PC Programming Manual

Pure IP-PBX

Model No. KX-NS1000

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

KX-NS1000: PCMPR Software File Version 001.10000 or later

Introduction

Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

Explains the layout and menus of Web Maintenance Console.

Sections 3 – 27, Web Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX.

Feature Programming References

Provides a list of all related programming items for each feature.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Guide References

The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and
facilities. Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections
from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Guide References

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Outlook, Internet Explorer, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel, Intel Core, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
• Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

2 PC Programming Manual
 Introduction

Notice
• During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data
to the Storage Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card, it can be easily reloaded.
• To save the system data to the Storage Memory Card, (1) click the button on the Home screen of Web
Maintenance Console before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) logout from Web
Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.

NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions
(FAQ).
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS1000NE) is omitted unless necessary.

PC Programming Manual 3
Introduction

The KX-NS1000UK and KX-NS1000NE are designed to interwork with the:

• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate
access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate
access
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd./Panasonic System Networks Company U.K. Ltd. declares that
the KX-NS1000UK and the KX-NS1000NE are in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available
for download by visiting:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact to Authorised Representative:
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

4 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Overview .................................................................................................13
1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................14
1.1.1 For Your Safety ..............................................................................................................14
1.1.2 Introduction .....................................................................................................................16
1.1.3 Entering Characters .......................................................................................................17
1.2 PC Programming .............................................................................................................21
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ...............................................................................21
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode ...........................................................................25
1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode ................................................28
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types ...............................................................................................29
2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console .........................................31
2.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................32
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts ............................................................................32
2.1.2 Access Levels ................................................................................................................34
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console .......................................................................37
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard .........................................................................................................38
2.1.5 Software Interface ..........................................................................................................41
2.1.6 Card Status ....................................................................................................................45
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting ..............................................................................................46
2.2 Logout ..............................................................................................................................47
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ..............................................................................48
3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen ............................................57
3.1 Home Screen ...................................................................................................................58
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard ....................................................................................61
4 Status ......................................................................................................63
4.1 Status—Equipment Status .............................................................................................64
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS ..................................................................................64
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information ..................................................................65
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information ..................................................................66
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status ..................................................................67
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB ..................................................................................68
5 System Control .......................................................................................69
5.1 System Control—Program Update ................................................................................70
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File ........................................70
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File ............................................72
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update ..................................................73
5.2 System Control—MOH ....................................................................................................74
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install ......................................................................................74
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete .....................................................................................75
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup ......................................................................76
5.3 System Control—FAX Card ............................................................................................77
5.4 System Control—System Reset ....................................................................................78
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown .............................................................................79
6 Tool ..........................................................................................................81
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup to USB ..............................................................................82
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ..............................................................................84
6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear ..........................................................................................85

PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents

6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group ....................................................................................86

6.5 Tool—Extension List View .............................................................................................87
6.6 Tool—Import ....................................................................................................................88
6.7 Tool—Export ....................................................................................................................93
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise ................................................................................................94
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup ...................................................................................................95
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup .....................................................................96
6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ................................................................97
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore ..................................................................................................98
6.11 Tool—UM Backup History ..............................................................................................99
6.12 Tool—Contact information ...........................................................................................100
6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting ..............................................................................................101
7 Utility .....................................................................................................103
7.1 Utility—Diagnosis .........................................................................................................104
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis .............................................................................104
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping ..............................................................................................106
7.2 Utility—File ....................................................................................................................107
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX .........................................................................107
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC .........................................................................108
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View .................................................................................................109
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete ..............................................................................................110
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX ..........................................................111
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC ..........................................................112
7.3 Utility—Log ....................................................................................................................113
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log ................................................................................................113
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog .....................................................................................................115
7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log ................................................................................116
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log ......................................................................................117
7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace ...................................................................................................118
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ....................................................118
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace ......................................................119
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace ...................................................120
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor ..................................................................121
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace ...............................................................122
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace ...................................................123
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) ...................................................124
7.5 Utility—Report ...............................................................................................................125
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report ..................................................................125
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information ...................................................126
7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports ...............................................................................127
7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report .....................................................................................130
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation ..............................................................................131
7.7 Utility—Email Notification ............................................................................................132
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ..................................................................................132
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ...............................................................133
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email .........................................................................134
7.8 Utility—Command .........................................................................................................135
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ..............................................................................135
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ...........................................................136
7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording ......................................................................138
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting .......................................138
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting .........................................139
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ..................................140
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance ................................................143

6 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ..............................................................................144

8 Users .....................................................................................................145
8.1 Users—User Profiles ....................................................................................................146
8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting .....................................................................148
8.2 Users—Add User ...........................................................................................................152
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User ...................................................................................152
8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users ...............................................................................156
8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording ......................................................................157
8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording .........................................157
8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List ..................................................158
9 PBX Configuration—Configuration ....................................................159
9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot ...................................................................160
9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary ...............................................163
9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key ......................................167
9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property ..................................170
9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property .........................................184
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main .................................184
9.5.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card .........................201
9.5.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM ...............................202
9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property ................................206
9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property .................................209
9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property ...................211
9.9 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property ....................217
9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property .....................218
9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property ..................247
9.11.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK
Settings ........................................................................................................................261
9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt
Pattern ..........................................................................................................................262
9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property ...................263
9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property .................265
9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property ..................270
9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property ...............279
9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property ................281
9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property .....................285
9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property ......................289
9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property ................295
9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property .................297
9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property ..........................303
9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property ............................306
9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ....................308
9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port .....................316
9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI
type .................................................................................................................................321
9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ......................330
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port .......................346
9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card
Property .........................................................................................................................360
9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station ..............................................362
9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option ..............................................................365
9.31 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Clock Priority ..................................................367
9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource .................................................368
9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting .....................................368

PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents

9.32.1.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource

Advisor .......................................................................................................................372
9.32.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage .....................................373
10 PBX Configuration—System ...............................................................375
10.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time ...............................................................376
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting .............................376
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving .......................377
10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight
Saving ........................................................................................................................379
10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM ........................................................381
10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters ....................................................383
10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table ................................................................401
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting ..........................................401
10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table .............................................................403
10.6 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan .........................................................405
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main ...............................................405
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial .......................................431
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature .................432
10.7 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service ........................................................435
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings .................................435
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External Call Block .........................452
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block ..........................453
10.8 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns ...................................................454
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO .............................454
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone .................455
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ........................456
10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options .........................................................458
10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings .............................................481
10.11 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain .................................................................485
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ...........................................485
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Card .......................................................487
11 PBX Configuration—Group .................................................................489
11.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group ................................................................490
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings .........................................490
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority .............................496
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification .............................497
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan ...........................................502
11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign .........................................504
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate ..........................................505
11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User Group ..................................................................506
11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group .......................................................507
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting ......................................508
11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group ..............................................................509
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—All Setting .............................................510
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—External Pager .....................................511
11.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group ..............................512
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings .......512
11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List ...............................................................................................................524
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time
Table ............................................................................................................................526
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ........527
11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group ...........................................529

8 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List .......................531

11.7 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group .....................................................................532
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings ........................................532
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings ..............................................534
11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List ....................536
11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group .............................................................538
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group—Member List .......................................540
11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group .......................................................541
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group—Member List ..................................543
11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group ....................................................................544
12 PBX Configuration—Extension ..........................................................545
12.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension ....................................................546
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings .....................546
12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate ....................................................................................................................575
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND ..................................578
12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial .................................579
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button ...........................580
12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button
data copy ...................................................................................................................593
12.1.5 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button ...................................594
12.1.6 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send .............595
12.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station ....................................................596
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings ......................596
12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate ....................................................................................................................622
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND ...................................625
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button ............................626
12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data
copy ...........................................................................................................................637
12.2.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send ..............638
13 PBX Configuration—Optional Device ................................................639
13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone ...................................................640
13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager .............................................643
13.3 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message ............................................644
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System ......................644
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message ...................648
13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay .............................................650
13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor ..........................................653
14 PBX Configuration—Feature ...............................................................655
14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial ....................................................656
14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge ..........................................................658
14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code ......................................................666
14.4 PBX Configuration—Feature—Second Dial Tone ......................................................669
14.5 PBX Configuration—Feature—Absent Message ........................................................670
14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant ........................................................................671
15 PBX Configuration—TRS ....................................................................675
15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code ....................................................................676
15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code ...............................................................677
15.3 PBX Configuration—TRS—Special Carrier ................................................................678
15.4 PBX Configuration—TRS—Emergency Dial ...............................................................679

PC Programming Manual 9
Table of Contents

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous .................................................................680

16 PBX Configuration—ARS ....................................................................683
16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting ...............................................................684
16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number .............................................................685
16.3 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time ..........................................................687
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting ....................................688
16.4 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Priority ......................................................689
16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier ..............................................................................690
16.6 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number Exception ...........................................693
16.7 PBX Configuration—ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG ..........................................694
17 PBX Configuration—Private Network ................................................695
17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table ......................................................696
17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission ......................699
17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP) ............................702
17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table ..........................................704
17.5 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit .............................706
18 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call ..........................................707
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings ..................................708
18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings ....................710
18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ......................................718
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic
Registration ..................................................................................................................721
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate ............723
18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table .............................................725
18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous .......................................730
19 PBX Configuration—Maintenance ......................................................733
19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main ...................................................................734
19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation .........................................747
20 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings .................................................753
20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings ..........................................................................754
21 UM Configuration—Class of Service ..................................................785
21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service ...........................................................................786
22 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service ...........................803
22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group ........................804
22.2 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment ...................807
23 UM Configuration—Service Settings .................................................809
23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing .........................810
23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters ...................................................813
23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service ............................................822
23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer ................824
23.3.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control .......................828
23.3.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control .......................830
23.3.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control ........................832
23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password ...........................833
23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table ...............................................836
24 UM Configuration—System Parameters ............................................841

10 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters .....................................................................842

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters ................................................847
25 UM Configuration—H/W Settings .......................................................877
25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings ................................................................................878
26 UM Configuration—System Security .................................................881
26.1 UM Configuration—System Security ..........................................................................882
27 Network Service ...................................................................................887
27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports ............................................................................888
27.2 Network Service—Server Feature ...............................................................................894
27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP ..................................................................894
27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP .....................................................................897
27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP ...................................................................899
27.2.4 Network Service—Server Feature—NTP .....................................................................900
27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP ..................................................................901
27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4 .................................................................905
27.3 Network Service—Client Feature .................................................................................907
27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP .......................................................................907
27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog ...................................................................909
27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent .........................................................910
27.4 Network Service—Other ...............................................................................................914
27.4.1 Network Service—Other—Security ..............................................................................914
Feature Programming References ...........................................................915

PC Programming Manual 11
Table of Contents

12 PC Programming Manual
 Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the

PBX.

PC Programming Manual 13
1.1.1 For Your Safety

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 For Your Safety

To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.

This notice means that misuse could result in death

WARNING or serious injury.

This notice means that misuse could result in injury

CAUTION or damage to property.

The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.

14 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.1 For Your Safety

WARNING

• Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

CAUTION

• Do not remove the Storage Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the
PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

• To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords

1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the PBX
system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

PC Programming Manual 15
1.1.2 Introduction

1.1.2 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Programming can be performed by system installers, on-site managers, and individual users. However,
managers and individual users may only change a limited number of settings. For details, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through system programming with Web Maintenance
Console. Starting Web Maintenance Console is described in 1.2 PC Programming. Individual system
programming items are described from Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen.

Programming Modes
There are two different modes available for programming using Web Maintenance Console:
• On-line Mode
On-line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to modify
the system data and settings used by the PBX. Settings can be modified and results are displayed in real
time. Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX’s temporary memory (DRAM). To finalise
the changes, you must either save the changes to the PBX’s Storage Memory Card by clicking or log
out of Web Maintenance Console by clicking . For details, see Web Maintenance Console Features
in 2.1.5 Software Interface.
• Off-line Mode
Off-line mode allows you to connect to a version of Web Maintenance Console running on your PC. Using
Off-line mode, you can create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. After you finish configuring settings, they can be saved
and uploaded to the PBX, which will update the PBX’s settings. For details, see Uploading Programmed
Settings to the PBX in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

16 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

1.1.3 Entering Characters

The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other
text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.

Table 1 (Standard)

PC Programming Manual 17
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 2 (For CE model)

18 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 3 (For RU model)

PC Programming Manual 19
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 4 (For GR model)

20 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

1.2 PC Programming

1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance
Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC.
This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Business, or Windows 7 Professional operating system
Recommended Display Settings
• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Supported Browsers for use with Web Maintenance Console
• Windows Internet Explorer® 8
• Windows Internet Explorer 9
• Mozilla® Firefox® version 6 or later
Always apply the latest updates to your Web browser software. For details, refer to your Web browser’s
documentation. Only the browsers and browser versions listed above are supported for use with Web
Maintenance Console.

Note
When using Windows Internet Explorer 8 or 9, there may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web
Maintenance Console. A message may be displayed that reads "Stop running this script?". This message
is automatically displayed when a script takes a long time to complete. If this message is displayed, click
No to continue using Web Maintenance Console. If you click Yes, you will have to close the browser window
for Web Maintenance Console and log in again. For information about disabling this prompt, refer to your
Web browser’s on-line support resources.
Browser Setting Requirements
The following functions must be enabled in the Web browser’s settings to use Web Maintenance Console:
• SSL 3.0
• Cookies
• JavaScript
• The ability to download files
• The display of animations
• The display of images
For details regarding the above settings, refer to your Web browser’s documentation.

PC Specifications (for programming in Off-line mode)

The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming in Off-line mode. For details
about programming in Off-line mode, see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

Recommended Specification

CPU 3.2 GHz Intel Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU

RAM 2048 MB

PC Programming Manual 21
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

Recommended Specification

Hard Disk 10 GB available space

Copyright for MD5

This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm).

Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.

Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

Licence is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived
from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the
derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty
of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

PC Connection (On-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, both the PC and the PBX must be connected. The
connection can be made through a local area network (LAN), a virtual private network (VPN), or over the
Internet. A PC can also be connected directly to the maintenance port of the PBX.

Note
• When connecting to Web Maintenance Console over the Internet, the use of an encrypted
communication method, such as SSL, is strongly recommended. For details, contact your network’s
administrator.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme in On-line mode:
1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a PC with the MNT port and access the PBX directly from the PC.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection.

Notice
• When connecting the PC to the MNT port, if the PC is set to obtain the IP address automatically,
the IP address of the PC will be set to an appropriate IP address to establish a connection to the
PBX. For more information about the connection procedure, refer to 5.2 PC Connection in the
Installation Manual.
2. Access Web Maintenance Console:
MNT Port connection:
Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as shown:
– 223.0.0.1

22 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

or
– http://kx-ns1000.
Note
If entering "http://kx-ns1000.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown.

LAN or VPN connection:

Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console
port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection to the PBX.
The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101

Internet connection (SSL Connection):

When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the Internet, the use of SSL is strongly
recommended. When using an SSL encrypted connection, the default port is 443. The format of the address
to enter to connect to the PBX using an SSL encrypted connection will be as follows:
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy
• "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of a device that can be accessed from the Internet, such as the
IP address of a network router.
• "yyy" is a port number. The network router’s port forwarding settings must be configured so that traffic
arriving at port "yyy" is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router
("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy") to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN, so that the packets sent to the
global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified
port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Note the usage of "https" instead of "http".
• If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using SSL, a security alert window is displayed. Follow
the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.

Note
• The IP address and Web Maintenance Console port number for the PBX can be changed from
their default values. If settings for the LAN port’s IP address or port number have been forgotten,
connect using the MNT port connection as described above and confirm the LAN port’s IP address
in 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and the port in 27.2.3 Network
Service—Server Feature—HTTP.
• You can also connect to the PBX in On-line mode using the Off-line Web Maintenance Console
Programme Launcher. For details, see Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme
Launcher in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see 2.1.3 Logging
in to Web Maintenance Console.
• If this is the first time the PBX is accessed (i.e., it is in its initialised, factory default state), you must log
in using the Installer level account. Once you log in, the Easy Setup Wizard will launch. For details,
see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If the PBX has been set up using the Easy Setup Wizard, PBX system programming can be performed.
To perform programming, enter the login name and password according to your status and
authorisation level. For details about the differences between levels of authorisation, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, See 2.1.5 Software Interface.

PC Programming Manual 23
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (Off-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in Off-line mode, use the New -Offline Mode or Open -Offline
Mode operations in the Off-line Web Maintenance Console programme launcher. For details, refer to 1.2.2 PC
Programming Using Off-line Mode.

24 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

PC Programming is performed by connecting to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console, which is also known
as On-line mode. However, as certain programming requires installed cards to be set to out of service (OUS),
or requires system settings to be changed, some programming cannot be performed while the PBX is in use.
Off-line mode programming is performed using the Off-line version of Web Maintenance Console, which you
install on your PC.
Off-line mode allows you to create new system data files and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. The programming changes can be saved and then later
uploaded to the PBX.
The following procedures outline how to install and use the Off-line Web Maintenance Console for Off-line
mode programming.

Installation
Note
• Be sure to install and use the latest version of "KX-NS1000 Off-line WEB-Maintenance Console".
• Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must be
installed on the PC:
– Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
– Microsoft .NET Framework 4
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s online Download Center.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in
as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Professional,
you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the "KX-NS1000 Off-line WEB-Maintenance Console" setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

The Programme Launcher

After Off-line Web Maintenance Console has been installed, you can run the Programme Launcher from the
Windows Start menu.

Note
Off-line Web Maintenance Console cannot be used when the PBX Web Manager for Unified PC
Maintenance Console (for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs) is running on the PC.
To disable the PBX Web Manager:
1. In the Unified PC Maintenance Console launcher, click Option®PBX Web Manager.
2. Deselect the Enable Web Server check box.
3. Click OK.
From the Programme Launcher, the following functions are available:

Starting a New System Data File

You can start a new session of PBX programming in Off-line mode. You can then programme PBX settings in
Off-line Web Maintenance Console and then save them to a file you can later upload to the PBX.

Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all
previous settings. Use this function only when necessary.

PC Programming Manual 25
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

To create a new system data file

1. In the Programme Launcher, click New -Offline Mode. The Off-line Web Maintenance Console login
screen will be displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging
in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. Log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account and password to start the
Easy Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

Opening an Existing System Data File

This operation will load a PBX settings system data file from your PC for programming in Off-line mode. The
system data file can be a file created earlier using Off-line Web Maintenance Console, or a system data file
downloaded from a PBX. You can then programme PBX settings using Off-line Web Maintenance Console
and then save the settings to a file you can later upload to the PBX.

To open a system data file

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Open -Offline Mode.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open, and then click OK.
The file will be loaded and the Off-line Web Maintenance Console login screen will be displayed in your
PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance
Console.
5. Log in using an account name and password associated with the system data file that was loaded.
Note
User (User) level accounts cannot be used to log in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console. For details about
account types, refer to 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Connecting in On-line Mode using the Programme Launcher

You can also use the Programme Launcher to log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode. You can
save the IP address and port information for each PBX in a profile. This feature is useful when there are multiple
PBXs in your network. For details about connecting to the PBX in On-line mode, see Connecting to Web
Maintenance Console (On-line Mode) in 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.

To connect in On-line mode using the Programme Launcher

1. In the Programme Launcher, click Connect -Online Mode.
The Connection dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select a profile from the drop-down list, or enter the IP address and Port manually.
3. Click Connect.
The Web Maintenance Console login screen for connecting directly to the PBX in On-line mode will be
displayed in your PC’s Web browser. For details about the login screen, see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web
Maintenance Console.

Editing and Printing Terminal Labels

You can create and print key label sheets that match the Flexible Button settings and then use the labels on
extensions. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print. The screen for editing and printing key
labels will be displayed. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

Options
You can specify the display language of the Programme Launcher, as well as set the web server port number
for Off-line Web Maintenance Console. In the Programme Launcher, click Options and change the settings
as necessary.

26 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

VoIP Test Tool

Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool
included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

IP Terminal Utility
Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility. This utility is identical to the IP Terminal
utility included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.

Programming in Off-line Mode

Once you have logged in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, programming is very similar to On-line mode.
The title bar will be coloured differently from when in On-line mode:

When programming in On-line mode:

When programming in Off-line mode:

Some items are not programmable when in Off-line mode, and those items will be greyed out. Some tools and
utilities are also not available in Off-line mode. For details, refer to 2.1.2 Access Levels.

Uploading Programmed Settings to the PBX

When programming in Off-line mode, clicking the icon will open a save dialogue box. Specify a location and
file name for the system data file. This file can then be uploaded to the PBX in On-line mode using the "File
Transfer PC to PBX" utility. For details, refer to 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX.

Notice
• When you upload a system setting file to the PBX, all existing settings on the PBX will be overwritten
with the settings in the file, including settings you may not want to change. To change only specific
settings in Off-line mode, follow the procedure below:
1. Use the "File Transfer PBX to PC" utility in On-line mode to save a file with the PBX’s current
settings. For details, refer to 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. Use the Open -Offline Mode command in the Programme Launcher to load the PBX system file
in Off-line mode.
For details, refer to Opening an Existing System Data File above.
3. Perform the desired programming in Off-line mode, and then click the icon to save the modified
system settings to your PC.
4. Log in to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, and then use the "File Transfer PC to
PBX" utility to upload the modified data to the PBX.
• When programming in Off-line mode, be careful when programming the following parameters:
– 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— Mailbox Password
(Message client)
– 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters— E-mail/Text
Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
These parameters require an activation key (KX-NSU2xx) to function. If these items are programmed
in Off-line mode, but the PBX does not have the required activation key installed, the values specified
for these parameters will be cleared when the data is uploaded to the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 27
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode

1.2.2.1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode

Follow the procedure below to print key label sheets for use with your system’s extensions.
1. In On-line mode, export PBX system data to your PC, and then open the exported data in Off-line mode.
a. In On-line mode, use the File Transfer PBX to PC utility to save your system’s data and settings to your
PC. For details, see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC.
b. Use the Programme Launcher to open the system data in Off-line mode. For details, see Opening an
Existing System Data File in 1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.
2. In Off-line mode, export the flexible key settings to a CSV file.
a. After logging in to Off-line Web Maintenance Console, click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Extension ® Wired Extension ® Flexible Button.
b. Click Export, specify a location to save the flexible key settings data, and then click OK.
Note
The Export button is available only when in Off-line mode.
3. Open the exported CSV data in the Terminal Label Print utility, and then edit the label settings as necessary.
a. In the Programme Launcher, click Terminal Label Print.
b. Select Open. Specify the exported CSV file in the dialogue that is displayed, and then click OK.
c. Edit the following settings as necessary:
Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding
button. (Max. 20 characters)
Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding
button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the
corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding
button. (Size value range: 4–15)
Telephone Type Specifies the model number of the telephone to determine the size
and shape of the label template.

4. Once the settings have been configured, click Key Label Print on the settings screen. Follow the Key
Label Print Wizard to print the key labels or to output the data as a PDF file.

28 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

One-look Network Configuration
Multiple KX-NS1000 PBXs can be connected together in a configuration called a One-look network. One
KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the Master unit, and other KX-NS1000 PBXs connect to the Master unit as Slave
units. Slave unit PBXs receive settings and operation instructions from the Master unit PBX. With this
configuration, it is easy to make network-wide changes by performing programming at only one PBX.

One-look Network Data Types

The data that is set when programming a One-look network using Web Maintenance Console is divided into
three categories: global data, local data, and connection data. The kind of data being programmed affects how
the programming is performed.

Data Type Description

Global Data Global data is related to the function of the PBX network as a whole. These settings
are unified network-wide, including extension and calling configurations.
Local Data Local data is related to the settings and functions of each Slave unit PBX. Local
data includes UM configuration settings and network settings.
Connection Connection data includes setting information for connecting the Master unit to
Data Slave units in the One-look network.

Details for Master units and Slave units are as follows:

Configuration
Description
Type
Master Unit This is the central PBX of a One-look network of KX-NS1000 PBXs. All PBXs in a
One-look network can be programmed by logging in to the Master unit via Web
Maintenance Console. Both the global settings (settings that apply to all PBXs)
and local settings (settings that apply only to a single Slave unit PBX) of the
One-look network can be programmed in one session. Slave units can also be
registered to the Master unit and then configured from the Master unit.
If the Master unit is set to out of service (OUS) for maintenance or due to a problem,
the One-look network cannot be used until the Master unit is returned to in service
(INS) status.

Note
When a single KX-NS1000 is used in a stand-alone configuration or other
networking configuration, for programming purposes it still must be set as the
Master unit.
Slave Unit Slave units receive programming information from the Master unit for all
system-wide functions, such as extension information and call handling. Each
Slave unit also contains local data programming settings, but these local settings
are still specified using the Master unit. When you log in to a Slave unit, you may
view all global data settings, but only that Slave unit’s local data and connection
data may be viewed. The only setting data that can be specified using a Slave unit
is connection data.
If a Slave unit is set to OUS, its resources cannot be used but otherwise the
One-look network will still function. The resources of the OUS Slave unit may be
used again when it is returned to INS status.

PC Programming Manual 29
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

Stand-alone and Other Networking Configurations

A KX-NS1000 PBX can be used as a single stand-alone unit, without connecting to other KX-NS1000 PBXs
in a One-look network. Programming is still performed by logging in to the PBX using Web Maintenance
Console. A KX-NS1000 PBX (including the Master unit of a One-look network) can also connect to other PBXs
using standards such as H.323. For details about other networking configurations, refer to 4.2.2 Network
Type Comparison in the Feature Guide.

30 PC Programming Manual
 Section 2
Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

This section serves as reference operating instructions

when using Web Maintenance Console to programme
the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 31
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts

2.1 Introduction

2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts

User account levels
Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts
in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The
Installer level is the highest authorisation level. There are also two levels for end users, Administrators and
Users. The usage for each level and number of accounts available for each level are as follows:

Level Description Number of Accounts/Network

Installer For dealers and system installers 1

User For on-site managers 32
(Administrator)
User (User) For end users Up to 1512*1

*1
The total number of administrator and user accounts combined cannot exceed 1512.

Differences between user levels

• Installer
The installer level account is the highest authorisation account of the three levels. This account level is to
be used by dealers or system installers. All system programming settings are available, and this account
is used for overall system installation and maintenance. The installer level can be used to programme
which menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts.
• User (Administrator)
Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings. This account level is used
by on-site managers and network administrators. Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance
Console to add users or programme user settings.
User (Administrator) accounts are intended for maintenance functions only. To manage their own PBX
user settings, on-site managers and network administrators should create their own User (User) accounts
for programming.
• User (User)
User accounts are for individual users of the PBX system. Users can use Web Maintenance Console to
change their extension settings, speed dial settings, or other personal settings by accessing a limited
number of pre-defined menus.

Note
• User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode. For details, refer to
1.2.2 PC Programming Using Off-line Mode.

Account Login Names and Passwords

Each account has a login name and password and are specified as follows. All account passwords are set in
Web Maintenance Console (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User).

32 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts

Level Login Name Password

Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,

and 0-9 (case sensitive).
For an initialised PBX that has not yet been
set up, the default Installer level password
is "1234". You will be prompted to choose
a new password for the Installer level
account when the Easy Setup Wizard is run
(see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
Administrator 1-16 character login name, using 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). and 0-9 (case sensitive). Set during
User Set during account creation. account creation.
(see 8.2.1 Users—Add User— (see 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single
Single User) User)

For more information about creating and managing end user accounts, see Section 8 Users.

CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the PBX
system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.

PC Programming Manual 33
2.1.2 Access Levels

2.1.2 Access Levels

Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the account
and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a menu option
is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for
example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."

The options available for each programming mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User (User); A: User (Administrator); I: Installer

Note
User (User) accounts cannot be used when programming in Off-line mode.
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.

Home Screen
Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

Site Selection ü ü ü ü ü
Add Site ü ü
System Information ü ü ü ü ü
Logout ü ü ü ü ü

Tool
Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

System Data Backup to USB ü ü

BRI Automatic Configuration ü
NDSS Link Data Clear ü
Call Pickup for My Group ü ü
Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü
Import®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Import®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Import®ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Import®ARS - Except Code ü ü
Import®ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Import®Wired Extension ü ü
Import®PS Extension ü ü
Import®Quick Dial ü ü

34 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

Import®SIP Extension ü ü
Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü
Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü
Import®V-SIPGW16 Settings ü ü
Import®V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü
Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü
Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Export®ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Export®ARS - Except Code ü ü
Export®ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Export®Wired Extension ü ü
Export®PS Extension ü ü
Export®Quick Dial ü ü
Export®SIP Extension ü ü
Export®V-IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü
Export®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü
Export®V-SIPGW16 Settings ü ü
Export®V-SIPGW16 Provider ü ü
Screen Customise ü ü
UM Data Backup ü
UM Data Restore ü
UM Backup History ü
Contact information ü ü ü ü
UT Option Setting ü ü

Utility
Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

Diagnosis®Card Diagnosis ü ü
Diagnosis®Ping ü
File Transfer PC to PBX ü
File Transfer PBX to PC ü

PC Programming Manual 35
2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option Off-line On-line

A I U A I

File View ü
File Delete ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü
Error Log ü ü
Syslog ü
Web-MC Event Log ü ü
UM System Log ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü
V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace ü
V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace ü
CS Status Monitor ü
Fax - Protocol Trace ü
Fax - Task sequence Trace ü
UM System Trace (Internal) ü
Digital Trunk Error Report ü
IP Extension Statistical Information ü
UM View Reports ü ü
E-mail Report ü ü
Activation Key Installation ü
Email Notification—Alert ü ü
Email Notification—System Analysis ü
Email Notification—Test Email ü
UM Command ü
UM – System Prompts Customisation ü ü
Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü ü ü
UM - System Maintenance ü ü

36 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance
Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first
time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must log
in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
For information about account names and passwords, see 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Login Screen

Login Restrictions
• Up to 32 User (User) and User (Administrator) level accounts may log in at one time to Web Maintenance
Console in On-line mode.
• Only 1 user may log in using the Installer level account at a time. If someone using the Installer level account
is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes, and another user logs in using the
Installer level account, the user logging in may override the other logged-in user so that programming can
be performed (a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently
logged-in user).
• Users can view only menus and setting items they may access according to their account level. For User
(Administrator) level accounts, the items that can be viewed can be set by the Installer level account. For
details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
• If two logged-in users change the same setting, the change made last will be the effective setting.
• If a user attempts to log in, but enters an incorrect password three times, the failure is recorded in the error
log of the PBX and the user may not attempt to log in again for a 5-minute period.

PC Programming Manual 37
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in to
Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard for
that PBX will launch automatically.
You must log in using the Installer level account name and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
After logging in, the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed. Select a language, and then click
Install.
1. In Location Setting:
a. Select a PBX Type:
• Master: Select for a PBX that will be registered as the Master unit of One-look Network. Also select
for a stand-alone PBX that will not be used in a One-look network.
• Slave: Select for a PBX that will be registered as a Slave unit of a One-look network. If Slave is
selected, go to step 1-d below.

Note
• If the Master unit is located on a different LAN than the Slave unit being registered, the
Slave unit will not be able to automatically detect the Master unit for registration. The IP
address of the Master unit must be specified. Enter the IP address of the Master unit in If
located on different network from Master PBX.
• For information about stand-alone systems and One-look networks, refer to "1.2.3 PBX
Configuration Types".
b. Select a Suffix Code from the drop-down list if Master is selected for PBX Type.
c. Select an Area from the drop-down list if Master is selected for PBX Type.
d. Click Next.
Note
If Suffix Code is changed from its default value, a notice about restarting the PBX is displayed. Click
OK to restart the PBX. After the PBX restarts, start Web Maintenance Console again (see
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console). When you start the Easy Setup Wizard again, you will
start from step 2, below.
2. In PBX Setting:
a. Specify a Site name if Master was selected for PBX Type in step 1.
b. Select a Time Zone from the drop-down list.
c. Click the Local Time box and select the date and time from the menu.
d. Click Next.
3. In LAN Setting, the IP addresses for the PBX, DNS server, and DSP cards can be assigned automatically
through a DHCP server or entered manually.

When using a DHCP server:

a. Select Obtain an IP address automatically.
b. Select Obtain DNS server address automatically.
c. Select Obtain DSP IP address automatically.
Notice
The boxes will turn grey and the IP address information will be assigned automatically. Write down
the address information assigned to the PBX for future reference.
d. Click Next.

38 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

When not using a DHCP server:

a. Select Use the following IP address.
b. Enter an IP address*1, Subnet Mask*2, and Default Gateway*1. (The default gateway may not need to
be specified depending on your network configuration.)
c.Select Use the following DNS server address.
d.Enter the preferred and alternative DNS IP addresses*1.
e.Select Use the following DSP IP address.
f.Enter up to 2 IP addresses*1 for each installed DSP card.
g.Click Next.
4. In Registration Setting, the IP Terminal Registration Mode and the One Look Networking (Trial
Activation Key) can be set.
a. Select the IP Terminal Registration Mode:
• Manual: Select this mode to manually register IP terminal information.
• Full Automatic: Select this mode to automatically register IP terminal information.
• Extension Number Input: Select this mode to automatically register IP terminal information except
its extension number. The extension number can then be registered from the IP telephone
manually.

Note
• Full Automatic and Extension Number Input registration methods may not be available for
certain types of IP terminals. In such cases, select the Manual registration method.
• For more information about the IP terminal registration modes, refer to 5.9 Registering IP
Telephones in the Installation Manual.
b. For One Look Networking (Trial Activation Key), specify whether to activate the 60-day One-look
Networking Trial Activation Key.
– If Active is selected, the 60-day trial will begin when the Easy Setup Wizard is completed.
– If Non Active is selected, you will have to activate the trial manually in order to use One-look
Networking Features on a trial basis.
c. Click Next.
If Slave has been selected in step 1, the Easy Setup Wizard will finish at this step. If LAN settings have
been changed from their default values in step 3, you will be prompted to restart the PBX. Click OK to
restart the PBX. Otherwise, the login screen will be displayed.
To add the PBX as a Slave unit PBX to the One-look network, use the Add Site Wizard from the Master
unit PBX’s Home Screen. See 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard.
5. In SNTP / Daylight Saving, enter information for Automatic Time Adjustment and Daylight Saving, and
then click Next.
6. In Maintenance Setting, the Installer password, information for SNMP Setting and SNMP Manager can
be entered.
a. Enter a password for the Installer level account in Installer password. Confirm your input in
Re-enter.
b. Specify settings for SNMP Setting and SNMP Manager if necessary. If you are unsure of your
network’s SNMP settings, contact your network’s administrator.
c. Click Finish.
7. Follow the prompts of the Easy Setup Wizard. After the Easy Setup Wizard is completed, if LAN settings
have been changed from their default values in step 3, you will be prompted to restart the PBX. Click OK
to restart the PBX. Otherwise, the login screen will be displayed.
8. Log in with the Installer level account using the password entered during Easy Setup Wizard. The Home
Screen is displayed. You may now begin programming the PBX.
*1
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
*2
Valid subnet mask address range: "0-255.0-255.0-255.0-255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")

PC Programming Manual 39
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

Notice
• The IP address of the PBX must not be changed once it is set. When an external DHCP server is used
to automatically assign IP addresses, it must be configured to always allocate the same IP address to
the PBX. For details, consult your network administrator.
• If an external DHCP server is in use, it must be able to use a "client identifier" option specified by RFC
2131.

40 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.5 Software Interface

2.1.5 Software Interface

This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.

Main Window
When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about connecting
to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.
The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below:

2
1 3

1. Logged in Account Level

The logged in account level is displayed.
2. Menu Buttons
Provides access to the three main components of Web Maintenance Console:

Button Description

Clicking this button will load the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can:
• View the status of connected PBXs in the One-look network
• Add PBXs to your One-look network
• Select a PBX to perform programming
For more information, see 3.1 Home Screen.
Home Screen
Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items. From the
Maintenance Screen, you can:
• Check the status and equipment of the selected PBX
• Backup or update PBX system files
• Use tools and reports to monitor and analyse system usage
Maintenance For more information, see Maintenance Screen Tree View Items below.
Screen

PC Programming Manual 41
2.1.5 Software Interface

Button Description

Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup
Screen, you can:
• Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards
• Programme settings for extensions and call handling
• Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions
Setup Screen
• Configure the Unified Messaging (UM) system
For more information, see Setup Screen Tree View Items below.

3. Web Maintenance Console Features

Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows:

Button Description

Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the Storage Memory
Card. Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is
turned off. Changes may also be lost if Web Maintenance Console is suddenly
Save Data terminated or the PC running Web Maintenance Console loses power unexpectedly.
Be sure to save the data periodically while programming, especially during long
programming sessions.
Clicking this button displays the Web Maintenance Console software version,
copyright notices, and licences.

System Note
Information Licence information is not displayed when programming in Off-line mode.

Clicking this button will save any programming changes to the PBX’s Storage Memory
Card and log you out of Web Maintenance Console. For more information, see
2.2 Logout.
Logout

4. Home Screen/Tree View

The Home Screen (shown above) displays the PBX icon view or PBX list view. The information and status
of PBXs in the One-look network can be managed and confirmed. For more information, see 3.1 Home
Screen.
When the Maintenance Screen or Setup Screen is selected, the tree view is displayed. The tree view is
used to display PBX setting items. Setting items are listed in categories, and by clicking items in the tree,
setting items are displayed to the right in the settings programming area. Some tree items have
sub-categories with additional options and settings. Clicking a sub-category will open an additional layer
of settings. Below is a summary of the tree view menu items for the Setup Screen and the Maintenance
Screen.

Maintenance Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions

Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware

• Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, UPS, etc.)
• Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system
For details, see Section 4 Status.

42 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.5 Software Interface

Item Primary Functions

System Control • Download and update PBX software files

• Manage music on hold (MOH) data
• Reset or shutdown the system
For details, see Section 5 System Control.
Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device
• View a list of PBX extensions
• Import and export PBX settings and user information
• Backup or restore Unified Messaging data
For details, see Section 6 Tool.
Utility • Perform tests for PBX cards and network connections
• Transfer files between the PBX and a connected PC
• View reports, error logs, event logs, and programme update logs
• Monitor and trace PBX communications and protocols
• Manage activation keys
For details, see Section 7 Utility.

Setup Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions

Users • Manage, view, and add PBX user profiles and account information
For details, see Section 8 Users.
PBX Configuration • Configure PBX hardware settings for cards, equipment, and networking
• Configure network-wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service
• Configure dialling features, call routing, and incoming call settings
• Configure call logging (SMDR) and other PBX maintenance items
For details, see Section 9 PBX Configuration—Configuration to
Section 19 PBX Configuration—Maintenance.
UM Configuration • Configure Unified Messaging mailboxes and voice mail subscriber settings
• Configure service settings and system parameters
• Configure hardware options
For details, see Section 20 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings to
Section 26 UM Configuration—System Security.
Network Service • Configure server and client features for the PBX
• Configure connections settings and network security
For details, see Section 27 Network Service.

PC Programming Manual 43
2.1.5 Software Interface

Site Selection Menu

When you are logged in to the Master unit of a One-look network and you are viewing programming screens
in the tree view, a site selection drop-down menu is displayed. You can select a PBX site in the One-look
network from the drop-down menu to programme items for that site.

Note
On some screens, the site selection menu will be inactive. This means that the currently displayed
programming items are set for the Master unit PBX only, and cannot be set for each Slave unit.

Standard Buttons
There are standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:

Button Function

OK Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM)

and closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen.
Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory (DRAM)
and remains on the same screen.

44 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.6 Card Status

2.1.6 Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service
(INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item.
Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in
1.1.2 Introduction).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line
mode only) in 9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 45
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting

2.1.7 Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming
various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make
selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this
Extension Number Setting window.

To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish
to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to
the first free spaces on the original screen.

Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items
can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.

Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, ICD Group, PS Ring Group, OGM(DISA), External Pager, FAX Unit, UM
Group, UM Extension

Extension Numbers & Names List

Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select
them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it
again.

Value Range
Matching extensions

Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers
and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be
transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.

Value Range
Available fields

Selected Extension List

Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from
this list, click it to select it and click Delete.

Value Range
Selected extensions

46 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 Logout

2.2 Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to the
Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory
(DRAM) of the PBX to the Storage Memory Card.

To logout
1. Click the button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
Note
• If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down, or
the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved to the Storage Memory Card will
be lost. To save settings while programming, click the button on the Home screen. Always end your
programming session by clicking the button.
• If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maintenance Console for 60 minutes
(default value), you will be automatically logged out.

PC Programming Manual 47
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to
programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:

Title Description

Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.

Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.

Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via a LAN connection.
A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports.
• Is the login name and password correct?

Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A • Yes. This is possible in Off-line mode.
Create a new system data file in Off-line mode (see 1.2.2 PC Programming Using
Off-line Mode), modify settings as necessary, and then upload this file to the PBX
later (see 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX).

Maintenance Console Software

Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A • From the Home Screen, access the List View (see 3.1 Home Screen). The software
version of the PBX is displayed on this screen.
• From 9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot, click Summary. Summary
information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.

Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too
narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the
table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.

48 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the
maximum supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-install"
for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed
correctly in the slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?

A • Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 9.30 PBX
Configuration—Configuration—Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service
(OUS)".

Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9.29 PBX
Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station.
A • Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced
De-registration option to delete the previous registration.

Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.

A • First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.

Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.

A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to
the CS and try the de-registration operation again.

Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not
available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station,
so it cannot be de-registered.

PC Programming Manual 49
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown
in Forced De-registration of 9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—
Portable Station.

Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable
Station still shows the old extension number.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still
shows the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is
necessary for it to operate.

Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was
engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A • The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the
conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main
screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
Digits from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
in Numbering.

Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?

50 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 10.6.1 PBX
Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows
a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows
a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.

Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by
any extensions (see 6.5 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of
those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension
number (see 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—
Extension Settings and 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable
Station—Extension Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension
numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• Another extension block
• A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—
Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?

PC Programming Manual 51
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q How do I change a feature number?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main
screen and navigate to the Features tab.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change a feature number.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—
Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main
screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—
Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.

52 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.

Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly

installed card?
A • Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for
Extension Card in the 9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option screen
from "Enable" to "Disable".

Saving Modified Data

Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the main screen.

Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to
the Storage Memory Card. If system data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card,
the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX
is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the button on the Home screen to save
the system data to the Storage Memory Card. Also, when you finish a programming
session, be sure to click the button to logout and save the system data to the
Storage Memory Card.

Note
Do not remove the Storage Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX.
Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A • The following setting data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card, so will be deleted
when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
• Advice of Charge (AOC)/Pay Tone
• Hospitality guest billing data
• Timed Reminder
• ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
• Remote Extension Dial Lock

Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO
Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or
"Pulse", as required.

Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

PC Programming Manual 53
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO

Port screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set
separately.

Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to "EXT".

Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either "QSIG-Slave"
or "QSIG-Master".

Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?

A • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration
—System—Class of Service—COS Settings screen.

Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?

A • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells
to select the COS levels whose extensions are blocked from calling each other.

Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?

A • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX Configuration
—System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells
to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a
particular COS in each time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).

Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?

A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System
Options screen.
For more details, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Guide.

Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls
directly?

54 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension number you chose for the
ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD group you
created from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension
Number column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table
& Port Settings screen, enter the floating extension number of the ICD group as
the DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.

Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group
—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number
of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.

Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)

group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the Incoming Call
Distribution drop-down list, select the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.

Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Forward / DND settings of the target extension on the 12.1.2 PBX
Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND or 12.2.2 PBX
Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND screen are set to
one of the forwarding settings.
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

PC Programming Manual 55
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

56 PC Programming Manual
 Section 3
Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

This section explains how to setup the main PBX and

other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 57
3.1 Home Screen

3.1 Home Screen

The Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console provides an overall view of your One-look network, and allows
you select a PBX to perform programming, or add a PBX to your One-look network. The Home Screen is
displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console. The screen can also be accessed by clicking the
Home Screen icon at the top of the Web Maintenance Console screen.

Note
• The first time you login to a PBX using Web Maintenance Console, instead of the Home screen the
Easy Setup Wizard is run. See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

1. PBX management buttons

These items provide site management functions as follows:

Icon Description

Add Slave
Click this button to run the Add Site Wizard to add a PBX as a Slave unit to the
One-look network.

Note
This is displayed only when logged in to the Master unit.

Icon View
Click this button to display the PBXs as icons (as in the above illustration).

58 PC Programming Manual
 3.1 Home Screen

Icon Description

List View
Click this button to view the following information in a list format:
• Site names
• Status (INS or OUS)
• IP address and MAC address
You can click Registration to register Slave units that have been added using the
Add Site Wizard. For details, see 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard. You
can also click De-Registration or Forced De-Registration to remove Slave units
from the One-look network.

Note
• When logged in to a Slave unit, only information for that Slave unit and the
Master unit is displayed.
• You can register or de-register Slave units only in On-line mode.

2. Master unit PBX icon

This is the icon and unit name representing the Master unit PBX. Click this icon to open the Setup Screen
for this PBX. You can also right-click the icon and select to open either the Setup Screen or the Maintenance
Screen.
3. PBX information
• The time of when Web Maintenance Console last received information from the PBX is displayed.
• The uptime of the PBX is displayed (the total time since the PBX was last reset).
4. Slave unit PBX icons
These 15 icons represent Slave unit PBXs under the control of the Master unit PBX. Units that have been
registered display a unit name and are coloured in. Remaining available unit positions are shown as greyed
out. You can right-click a registered PBX and select Maintenance, Setup, or Direct Login for that PBX.
Selecting Direct Login will display the Login screen for that PBX. For details about the login procedure,
see 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.

Note
• For the following items related to the Unified Messaging (UM) programming of a Slave unit, you
must select Direct Login to log in to the PBX that the UM Group in which programming will be
performed belongs to:
– 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status
– 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB
– 5.3 System Control—FAX Card
– 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup to USB
– 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
– 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
– 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History
– 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log
– 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)
– 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace
– 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace
– 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
– 7.8 Utility—Command
– 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
– UM Configuration settings
(For details for UM Configuration settings, see "Section 20 UM Configuration—Mailbox
Settings" to "Section 26 UM Configuration—System Security".)

PC Programming Manual 59
3.1 Home Screen

PBX Status Icons

If the PBX is in service (INS) and operating normally, the unit will be displayed as shown above. Icons are
displayed on PBX units when they are not in service and operating normally. The following icons are displayed
on PBX units according to their status:

Icon Description

PBX Warning
A warning error has occurred on the PBX. Click a PBX with this icon to display the
PBX’s error log.
PBX Alarm
An alarm has occurred on the PBX. Click a PBX with this icon to display the
PBX’s error log.
Maintenance Mode
This PBX is installed but it is out of service (OUS) and maintenance is being
performed on it. PBXs with this icon are visible on the home screen, but they are
currently not connected to other PBXs in the One-look network.
Pre-install Mode
This PBX is installed but it is out of service (OUS) and has not yet been put in
service (INS). The free trial period for activation key trials has not yet begun.

60 PC Programming Manual
 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

The Add Site Wizard, which is run from the Home Screen, will add KX-NS1000 PBXs to your One-look network
as Slave units.
• The PBX to be added must have been configured as a Slave unit using the Easy Setup Wizard. See
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
1. To start the Add Site Wizard, click the Add Slave button ( ) on the Home screen. For details about the
Home Screen, see 3.1 Home Screen.
2. Follow the prompts of the Add Site Wizard to complete the following settings:
– PBX Setting
– Registration Setting
– SNTP / Daylight Saving
– Maintenance Setting
Note
• The parameters which appear in the settings above are described in 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If 2 or more sites will be added to the One-look network, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each site.
3. After the Add Site Wizard is completed, click Registration on the List View of the Home screen.
4. A list of KX-NS1000 PBXs set up as Slave units will be displayed under Available sites for
registration:. Select PBXs by their assigned site names and click the right arrow to move them to Selected
sites for registration:.
Click Next to start the registration process.
5. On the Registration Executing screen, the status of PBXs being registered is displayed.
6. On the Registration Completed screen, the result of the registration process is shown. Click Close to
continue.
Registered Slave PBXs can now be viewed and selected on the Home Screen for programming.

Removing registered Slave units from the One-look network

To remove a Slave unit from the One-look network, there are two methods: De-registration and Forced
De-registration.

Method Description

De-registration • Registration information and settings for the Slave unit are
deleted from the Master unit.
• The De-registered Slave unit is reset to its initialised state
(factory default state).
Forced De-Registration • Registration information and settings for the Slave unit are
deleted from the Master unit.
• The De-registered Slave unit is not reset to its initialised
state. Information and settings registered on the Slave unit
remain.

1. Set the Slave unit to be removed to out of service (OUS) status.

2. From the List View of the Home Screen (see 3.1 Home Screen) click De-registration or Forced
De-registration.
3. Select the PBX(s) by site name, click the arrow to move them to the selection box, and click Next.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Click OK to continue.
A removal status screen will be displayed. Each selected PBX will be removed one at a time. After each
successful removal, a confirmation message will appear. Click Continue to proceed to the next PBX to
remove.

PC Programming Manual 61
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

5. When all removal is complete, a message will be displayed. Click Close to finish.

62 PC Programming Manual
 Section 4
Status

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 63
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS

4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS

Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX
• UPS Connection Status
Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information
below will be displayed for the UPS system.
• Battery Voltage (V)
The voltage of the UPS battery is displayed (0-240 V).
• Battery Charge Percentage (%)
The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed (percentage value).
• Power Supply
Displays the usage status of the UPS (if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX).
• UPS Shutdown Conditions - Battery level
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown
procedures.
For more information about setting up a UPS system, refer to 4.12 Starting the PBX—Connecting an
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Installation Manual.

64 PC Programming Manual
 4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information

4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target
V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Slot Number of the slot

Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version Version number of the programme file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the programme file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case
of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension
number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model.
For more details, see the documentation for your CS.
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.

To view CS information
1. From the Target CS I/F Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
4. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
6. If you started to save the CS information in step 3, click Capture, then click Stop to record the information
to the specified file.
7. Click Close to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 65
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

PS No. PS location number.

Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.

66 PC Programming Manual
 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status

4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status

The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The
screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways:
• Online (Ready): The port is ready to be used.
• Incoming Call: The port is handling an incoming call.
• Outgoing Call: An outgoing service is being processed.
• Error Occurred: An error has been detected.
• Off Line: The port is offline.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 67
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount
button.
• Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device from
the PBX, click Unmount.

Note
If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount, the data on the
USB memory device may be damaged.
• None: No USB memory device is detected by the PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

68 PC Programming Manual
 Section 5
System Control

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen
when programming using Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 69
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

5.1 System Control—Program Update

The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update feature.

Hardware that can be updated using Program Update

• KX-NS1000 (Mother Board)
• KX-NCP0158 (DECT 6.0 CS)
• KX-NCP0158CE (DECT CS)
• KX-UT133 (SIP phone)
• KX-UT136 (SIP phone)
• KX-UT113 (SIP phone)
• KX-UT123 (SIP phone)
• KX-NT321 (IP-PT)
• KX-NT343 (IP-PT)
• KX-NT346 (IP-PT)
• KX-NT366 (IP-PT)

5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBXs in the One-look network.
Manual and automatic methods are available.
Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
• If these operations are performed when logged in to a Slave unit, only the manual method can be used,
and files may only be acquired from a local PC or a USB memory device.
• The programme files to download to the KX-NS1000 PBX must be named in a specific way that includes
the version number.
Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx"
("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)

Manual
Using manual operations, the location of updated PBX software is specified and downloaded to the Master
unit, and then transferred to any Slave units.
To download programme files manually
1. In Location of program files, specify the location of the updated files from the Look in drop-down list.
The choices are as follows:
• Local PC
Click Browse and specify the location of the updated programme files stored on the PC logged in to
Web Maintenance Console.
• USB Memory
If a USB memory device is inserted into the PBX, the contents of the following directory on the device
will be checked for updated files:
/private/meigroup/psn/ippbx/update
• FTP Server
The PBX connects to the specified FTP server and checks for updated files. Specify an FTP server
from the FTP connection name drop-down list, and specify the number of attempts to connect to the
FTP server in No. of Retry.
To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP.
• Master Unit
The most recent versions of files previously downloaded to the Master unit are displayed.
2. In Available Program File(s), specify which PBX programme files will be automatically downloaded by
checking the boxes next to each hardware item.

70 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

3. Click Execute, and then click OK on the confirmation message that appears. When the transfer is complete,
click OK.

Note
• When the system is downloading data from an FTP server, the screen will not change when
downloading is complete. In order to confirm that downloading has completed, leave this screen and
access it again to refresh the display.
• If downloading cannot be completed within 10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection
problems), the download operation will be cancelled.

Automatic
The Master unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated programme files. If an update is
available, the Master unit will download the data. The downloaded software is then sent over the One-look
network from the Master unit to all Slave units.
To download programme files automatically
1. Specify an FTP site from the drop-down list for FTP connection name.
To specify a new FTP site, see 27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP.
2. In Check time and date, specify when the PBX will contact the FTP server to check for updates. The check
can be performed on a daily or weekly basis.
3. Check Download Automatically to download updated files if they are discovered on the FTP during a
check.

Note
If Download Automatically is not checked, the updated files will have to be downloaded manually
(see the manual procedure above).
4. In Email Notification specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive an e-mail notification when updated
files have been discovered or when updated files have been downloaded.

Note
If Download Automatically is not checked in step 3, specify at least one e-mail address so that an
administrator will be notified when updated files have been discovered.
5. To begin automatic checking for updates according to Check time and date, click Execute.
6. The PBX will now periodically perform checks and downloads as specified in the settings. Click Download
Cancel on this screen to stop automatic programme updates.

Note
When the system is downloading data from an FTP server, if downloading cannot be completed within 10
minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection problems), the download operation will be
cancelled.

PC Programming Manual 71
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to update
the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a specified time,
or the update process can be carried out manually.
You must be connected to the PBX in On-line mode to update programme files.

Update Immediately (Manual update)

Specify the files to update and which PBXs to update.
1. In Available Program File(s), specify which PBX programme files will be updated by checking the boxes
next to each hardware item.
2. In Select the target to update, specify which PBXs will be updated using the specified files by checking
the boxes next to each PBX unit.
3. In Email Notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Execute.
The programme files are updated to the specified PBXs.

Note
• Updated PBXs reset when the update is complete.
• If this operation is performed when logged in to a Slave unit only the PBX mother board and
hardware specifically registered to the Slave unit may be updated.

Automatic (timed) update

Specify the programme files to update, which PBXs to update, and a time to execute the update.
1. In Available Program File(s), specify which PBX programme files will be updated by checking the boxes
next to each hardware item.
2. In Select the target to update, specify which PBXs will be updated using the specified files by checking
the boxes next to each PBX unit.
• In Update Time, specify the time of day when the update will be executed.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Execute.
The programme files will be updated to the specified PBXs at the specified time.

Note
All PBXs in a One-look network must be using the same version of the software. When updating PBXs
connected in a One-look network, note the following:
• Apply the same version of the software update to all the PBXs in the One-look network.
• When updating the programme files for multiple PBXs, an immediate (manual) update is
recommended. For Automatic (timed) updates, set the same Update Time for all PBXs in the One-look
network.

72 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs to be automatically updated to the latest software version when
they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version number of the system software
stored on the Master unit is compared to the system software currently in the IP-PT, after the IP-PT has been
registered to the PBX. If the software on the Master unit is newer, it is downloaded to the IP-PT. Plug and
Update can be enabled for each site in a One-look network using the following procedure:
The Plug and Update screen lists the PBXs in the One-look network by site number and site name. By default,
Plug and Update is set to Off for all sites.
1. In Plug & Update, select On for each to enable this feature.
2. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 73
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install

5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install

Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time.
2. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will install the sound file as an MOH file.
3. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
4. In BGM No., specify which BGM number the MOH file will occupy.
5. Click Execute to confirm the settings. If "Now" is set for Time Set, the installation will begin at this time.
Note
• Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One-look network sites. Users logged in to
a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• Only WAV files can be installed, and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length (including the
file extension ".wav"). If non-alphabetic characters are used, the file name must not exceed 14
characters in length.
• Some language codes for file names are not supported, and file names may not display correctly after
they are installed on the PBX. To ensure proper display, use only the ASCII character set for file names.
• Files may not be larger than 80 MB in size.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

74 PC Programming Manual
 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete

5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete

MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. In BGM No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data saved in
all BGM numbers.
2. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will delete MOH files from the specified BGM numbers.
3. Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers.
Note
• Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One-look network sites. Users logged in to
a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

PC Programming Manual 75
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. From Site No., select a PBX from which to download MOH files.
2. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One file
can be backed up at a time.
3. A save file dialogue will appear. Specify the directory on the PC to back up the file to.
4. Click OK when finished.
Note
• Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One-look network sites. Users logged in to
a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added. The
amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—
Install is not reflected in this value.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

76 PC Programming Manual
 5.3 System Control—FAX Card

5.3 System Control—FAX Card

This function is used to restart the optional FAX Card after it is installed in the PBX. For details about installing
the FAX Card, refer to 4.3.4 FAX Card (KX-NS0106) in the Installation Manual.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Execute.
2. Click OK.
3. The card is restarted and a confirmation message is displayed. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 77
5.4 System Control—System Reset

5.4 System Control—System Reset

When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows
a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console.
When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should be
performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if settings
or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite the
imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
2. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will be reset after the backup has been
performed.
• Skip: The system is reset without performing a backup.
If you are logged in to the PBX that is reset using this command, it is necessary to re-log in to Web Maintenance
Console to continue programming.

78 PC Programming Manual
 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance
Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown.
When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should
be performed before the shutdown to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if
settings or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite
the imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Select the PBX site(s) to shut down in the Select Site drop-down menu.
2. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
3. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will prepare for shutdown after the backup has
been performed.
• Skip: The system is prepared for shutdown without performing a backup.
4. The STATUS LED on the front of the PBX will flash amber. When shutdown preparations are completed,
the STATUS LED will stop flashing and remain a solid amber. Once the STATUS LED stops flashing, you
may turn off the power switch on the back of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 79
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

80 PC Programming Manual
 Section 6
Tool

This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of

the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 81
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup to USB

6.1 Tool—System Data Backup to USB

A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a later
time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a USB memory device

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.
Note
• To check the inserted USB memory’s status, see 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB.
• The USB memory device must be compatible for use with the PBX. For details, refer to
4.9 Connection of Peripherals—USB Interface for Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and
USB Memory Device—Using a USB memory device in the Installation Manual.
• If an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) device is connected to the PBX with a USB cable, the
USB cable must first be removed, then reconnected after the backup to USB has been completed.
For details about the connection between the UPS and the PBX, refer to 4.12 Starting the PBX
—Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Installation Manual.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
• Activation Key
Activation key files that were installed on the PBX are backed up.
Any or all of the above items may be selected. However, the system cannot be restored unless System
Data is specified.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the USB memory device, it
will be deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A time estimation for the backup will be displayed. Click Continue.
5. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when the
backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Use a USB memory device with a capacity of at least 512 MB. During the backup process, if an error
message is displayed indicating there is not enough free memory space on the USB memory device,
delete other unnecessary files on the USB memory device, or use a USB memory device with a larger
capacity.

Restoring backed up data from a USB memory device to a PBX

Follow the procedure below to restore the backed up data to a PBX.

Note
The restoration process first requires an initialisation of the PBX, which returns the PBX to its factory default
state. Under the following conditions, restoration may not be possible, even though the PBX has been
initialised.
• The USB memory device hardware is faulty.
• The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted.
• The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process.

82 PC Programming Manual
 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup to USB

To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the USB
memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore process.
1. The PBX must be in a powered-off state.
2. Insert the USB memory device with the backup data into the USB port of the PBX.
3. Set the PBX’s System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
4. Turn on the PBX’s power switch. The STATUS indicator will flash green. Slide the System Mode Switch
back to the "NORMAL" position. The restore process will begin and the STATUS indicator will flash rapidly.
5. When the restoration process is completed, the PBX will restart automatically.

PC Programming Manual 83
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI
Mode, on the Network tab of the 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port screen.

Note
• To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
2.1.6 Card Status.
• At any time on this screen, you can click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving.

To configure the BRI card

1. In Check, select the card, and then click OK.
2. Click Execute.
The results of the automatic configuration will be displayed.
3. Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
4. Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.

84 PC Programming Manual
 6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

6.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and
monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG
network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To clear the NDSS Link Data

When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click OK to clear the data.
• Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.

PC Programming Manual 85
6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

6.4 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—
Quick Dial and 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can
answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0".

To activate this tool

1. When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the extension
is assigned to first personal speed dial.

Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.

86 PC Programming Manual
 6.5 Tool—Extension List View

6.5 Tool—Extension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according
to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.

The types that can be displayed are as follows:

Type Detail

Wired Extension Wired Extension

Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group
OGM (DISA) DISA
External Pager External Pager
UM Group Unified Messaging UM Group

PC Programming Manual 87
6.6 Tool—Import

6.6 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 6.7 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types cannot
be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor,
before importing.

The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:

Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Data Type Import Destination

System Speed Dialling Number Location

Name Name
CO Line Access Number + Dial
Telephone Number
CLI Destination CLI Destination

Related programming: 14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Data Type Import Destination

Location Location
DDI/DID Number Dial In Number
DDI/DID Name Dial In Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night Destination-Night
Tenant Number Tenant Number
Service Group No. Group number for VPS answer
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night CLI Ring - Night

Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

88 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

ARS - Leading Digit

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Leading Number Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number

Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

ARS - Except Code

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Leading Number Exception Exception Code

Related programming: 16.6 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan

Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.3 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time

Wired Extension
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location (selected automatically)

Extension Number Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

Related programming: 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PS Extension
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location (selected automatically)

Extension Number*1 Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected automatically)

*1
This data can only be exported, and cannot be imported.

Related programming: 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 89
6.6 Tool—Import

Quick Dial
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number

Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

SIP Extension
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Extension Number Extension Number
Password Password

Related programming: 9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

V-IPGW16 GW Settings
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
GW Name GW Name
GW IP Address GW IP Address
GW Group GW Group No.
Connection for IP-GW16 Connection for IP-GW16
Protocol Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A) Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu) Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Voice Activity Detection for G.711
FAX Sending Method FAX Sending Method
Maximum Bit Rate Maximum Bit Rate
FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability
DTMF DTMF
Payload Type Payload Type

90 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Import

Data Type Import Destination

T38 FAX Max Datagram T38 FAX Max Datagram

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy
Redundancy
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages
for T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data
for data
T38 FAX Rate Management Method T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Related programming: 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property—GW Settings–

Main

V-IPGW16 DN2IP
Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Leading Number Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits Remaining Number of Digits
GW No./GW Group Selection GW No./GW Group Selection
GW Group GW Group
GW No. GW No.

Related programming: 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property—DN2IP

V-SIPGW16 Settings
Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

V-SIPGW16 Provider
Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

To import system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click OK to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data
(system or tenant) from the drop-down list.

PC Programming Manual 91
6.6 Tool—Import

6. If required, select import fields.

When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and
destination fields are entered by default.
• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.

92 PC Programming Manual
 6.7 Tool—Export

6.7 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
6.6 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, found in the Windows Control Panel’s "Regional Options".

To export system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Select the check boxes next to the names of the fields to export, and then click OK.
3. If a message window is displayed, click OK.
4. In the file selection screen, select the Save check box, and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 93
6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

6.8 Tool—Screen Customise

Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator)
account level.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User
(Administrator) account level.

To modify displayed screens

1. Click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.

94 PC Programming Manual
 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup

The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a USB
memory device connected to the PBX.
a. System Prompts
– Installed Prompts
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greetings
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts
– Owner Name
– Personal Greetings
– Personal Caller ID Name
– Interview
– Personal Group List Name
– EMD List Member Name
c. Mailbox Messages
Note
Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process. Additionally, Unified
Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data. For these reasons, we
recommend backing up data when the Unified Messaging system is not in use.
The UM Data Backup tool can be executed manually or scheduled to run automatically at regular intervals.
Refer to the following:
• 6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

PC Programming Manual 95
6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup

6.9.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup

Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can be
backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
1. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes
of the items you want to back up.
2. To back up mailbox prompts, select the check box next to Mailbox Prompts and select which prompts to
back up.
3. To back up the prompts for specific mailboxes, click Mailbox Prompts to open the mailbox list. Check the
top checkbox to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes for which you wish to back up prompts, then
click OK.
4. To back up mailbox messages, check the box next to Mailbox Messages button and click Mailbox
Messages to open the mailbox list. Select the top check box to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes
you wish to back up, and then click OK.
5. Connect a USB memory device to the USB port of the Master unit PBX.
6. The data will be backed up to the USB memory device connected to the Master unit PBX. For USB(Main
Unit), specify a folder for saving the backup data on the USB memory device.
7. Click OK to start the backup.
Note
• The system will prepare the data to be backed up, and the backup will begin about 30 seconds later.
The time needed to backup the data will vary depending on the communication speed and the amount
of data that is being backed up.
• Deleted messages will not be backed up when backing up Mailbox Messages.
• To back up the Unified Messaging data of a Slave unit in a One-look network, log in to the Slave unit
and perform the backup operation from the Slave unit.

96 PC Programming Manual
 6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

6.9.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically backup the selected
data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device connected to the PBX. For details on the items that can
be backed up, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup.
Follow the procedure below to schedule an automatic backup.
1. Click to create a new scheduled backup.
2. Enter a description for the backup.
3. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day when the backup should take place.
4. Check the desired item(s) to backup.
5. Click Edit next to Mailbox Prompts.
6. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Edit next to Mailbox Messages.
9. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup. You can also specify the following
backup conditions:
• Retention Days: Back up only messages that have been stored on the system for at least the number
of days specified.
• Remaining mailbox Capacity (min): Only perform a backup if the remaining mailbox capacity has
reached the specified amount.
• Delete After Backup: Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox.
• Message Type: Specify to back up all messages, or only messages marked as "old".
Note
An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring. For example, if a mailbox
is full, but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention Days, or no
messages are marked as "old", the backup will not be performed.
10. Specify the folder on the USB memory device where you want to save the system backup file.
11. Click OK.
12. In Status, select Enable and click OK.
Note
• Up to 20 backup events can be scheduled.
• If multiple scheduled backups overlap (i.e., if a second backup is scheduled to begin and the first
scheduled backup has not finished), the second backup will not be executed.
• If a manual backup is executed and has not finished by the time a scheduled backup is set to begin,
the scheduled backup will not be executed.
• If a backup is scheduled, but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the
scheduled backup, the backup will not be performed.

Editing a scheduled backup

1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to edit.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.
Deleting a scheduled backup
1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 97
6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore

Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore data
from a USB memory device connected to the PBX.
1. Select the check boxes of the items to restore.
2. In System Restore, select a file or folder stored on the USB memory device.
To restore a single file:
If a file matches the type of the checked item, it will be highlighted.
Click a file in the list to display its name in the USB Flash Drive (main unit) text box. You can also click
a folder name to display that folder’s contents, and then click a file to select it.

To restore multiple files at once:

If a folder’s contents matches the types of the checked items, it will be highlighted.
Click a folder in the list to display its name in the USB Flash Drive (main unit) text box. You can also click
a folder name to display that folder’s contents, and then click a folder to select it.
3. Click OK to restore the selected file or folder of files.
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the USB
memory device. To view this file, you must connect the USB memory device to a PC, and then open the text
file.

Note
• When restoring multiple items, only files that match the items for which check boxes have been selected
will be restored. Also, even if data exists in the specified folder of the USB memory device, the data
will not be restored unless the check box of the matching item has been selected.
• Data in sub-folders of a selected folder will not be restored.
• If more than one file matches a selected item, the newest file will be restored.
• The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names are
changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data items.
• A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber’s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a
New/Old/Deleted copy of the same message.

98 PC Programming Manual
 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen:
• Description
• Parameters
• Completion Status
• Date & Time
• Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS)
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 99
6.12 Tool—Contact information

6.12 Tool—Contact information

Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item, this
information will be displayed for the user’s reference.
1. Input the following information, and then click OK.
• Company Name
• Telephone Number
• Fax Number
• Address
• URL
• Email Address

100 PC Programming Manual

 6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting

6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting

Option settings can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones on a system-wide level.

Note
The following apply when programming in On-line mode only:
• To apply changes made to these settings for KX-UT series SIP phones connected to Slave unit PBXs
in a One-look network, be sure to click the icon after programming. Otherwise, there may be a delay
of 30 minutes or more before changed settings are applied.
• To set these parameters, all installed V-UTEXT32 cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see
9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot.

Numbering Plan for UT Series Terminal

One or more number dialling plans can be specified for KX-UT series SIP phones. Enter the dial plan text string
into the text box, and then click OK. A dial plan text string may also be copied and pasted into the text box
from another source.

Note
• For more information about dial plans, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series
SIP phone.
• You can enter up to 500 characters in the dial plan text box.
• You can assign up to 20 dial plans, separating them with a "|" (vertical bar).
• You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan.
• When OK is clicked, the entered text string will be validated. If there is a validation error, a message
will be displayed.

Timer for UT Series Terminal

This timer specifies for KX-UT series SIP phones how long the system waits for another digit to be dialled
before determining that dialling has finished. This value will apply for all KX-UT series SIP phones connected
to the PBX. Specify a number of seconds in Extension Inter-digit (s), and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 101

6.13 Tool—UT Option Setting

102 PC Programming Manual

 Section 7
Utility

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 103

7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis

7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis

Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to
be used again.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To begin diagnosis
1. Click the OUS button next to each card to be tested.
2. Click Test.
3. The Test Menu is displayed. Depending on the cards specified for testing, select one of the following tests,
and click OK.
• Card Test
• Loopback Type (PRI23 card only)
Details for each test screen are as follows.

Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary according
to the type of card being tested.

The tests that are performed on each card are as follows:

Test Type Available Cards

Local loop back diagnosis SLC2, LCOT2, BRI4, PRI23, PRI30

DTMF Receive test port SLC2
Framer IC alarm signal detection PRI23, PRI30
diagnosis
Framer IC error detection diagnosis PRI23, PRI30
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis LCOT2
Extension mode setting test BRI4

To perform a card test

1. Click Test to perform the test(s).
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
2. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information as a CSV file.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Test Menu screen.

104 PC Programming Manual

 7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis

Note
To run consecutive card tests on the BRI4 card, you must change the card’s status to INS, then OUS again
after running each test.

Network Loopback Test

Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.

Note
To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 9.27 PBX
Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting to "Enable".

To perform a network loopback test

1. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform.
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
2. Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
3. After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
4. Click Cancel to return to the Test Menu screen.

PC Programming Manual 105

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address
across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To perform a Ping test

1. Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
2. Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen.

106 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX

7.2 Utility—File

7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX

Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX.
Pre-existing files on the Storage Memory Card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see 5.4 System
Control—System Reset) for DCSYS files.

The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported
data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.

The names of all files that can be stored on the Storage Memory Card are as follows:

System Data
Name on Storage Memory Card Corresponding Card

DCSYS Mother Board

DCSYS_R Mother Board*1

*1
DCSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DCSYS_R".

To transfer files to the Storage Memory Card

1. The dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload, and click OK.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the Storage Memory Card, the PBX automatically renames them according to
the header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 107

7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC

7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC

Copies system data files from the Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

The files that can be downloaded from the Storage Memory Card are as follows:

File Name File Type

DCSYS System data

$SYSERR Error data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
UT_ACS KX-UT series SIP phone configuration
data

• Downloading the DCSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX.
• The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there
is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered
in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
• KX-UT series SIP phone configuration data can be transferred to a PC, and then imported using the
phone’s Web user interface. For details, refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX-UT series SIP
phone.

To transfer files to the PC

1. Select the file to download from the list of files on the Storage Memory Card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
2. Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
• A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
• A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
6. Click OK.

108 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

Displays a list of files on the Storage Memory Card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card.
The effective date, PCMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation
keys are displayed on the Detail screen.

To view information on activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card
1. Click on the name of the desired activation key file.
2. Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 109

7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the Storage Memory Card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The DCSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility.

Note
Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update is
currently being performed. For details, see 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program
File.

To delete files from the Storage Memory Card

1. Click on the file to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
3. Click OK.
The display will return to the File Delete screen.

110 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the Storage Memory Card.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it
will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.

To transfer OGMs to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the destination to transfer the OGM files to from the drop-down list, and then click Browse.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload. The files must be in the WAV format.
It is possible to select multiple files.

Note
• When selecting files to copy to the PBX, the file names (apart from the file extension) cannot be
more than 33 characters in length.
• When selecting G.711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX, the total file size of all selected files
combined cannot exceed 32 megabytes.
4. Click OK.
• The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
• An index number (01 to 64) will be appended automatically to the file names of message files
transferred to the PBX.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 111

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the Storage Memory Card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To transfer OGMs to the PC

1. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.
4. Click OK.
• When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a number
appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the Storage Memory Card.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

112 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

7.3 Utility—Log

7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function

Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.

Save Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result
in system failure.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description

Index The ordinal number assigned to an error record in the current log.
Date The date of the error detection.
Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 113

7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Item Description

Sub Code SMDR:

The 8-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBWXYYZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ). (The site
number of the PBX can be confirmed in the Site column of the Error Log.)

• BB: Site ID (00 to 15)

– Corresponds to site numbers of PBXs in the One-look network (1
to 16)
• W: Slot type
– Physical slot: " " (blank)
– Virtual slot: "*" (asterisk)
• X: (1: Unit number, 5: Other than PBX process code)

When X=1
• YY: Slot number
– Physical slot: 00 to 05
(00: Mother Board; 01 to 05: Optional service card slots)
– Virtual slot: 01 to 52
(01 to 16: Virtual Trunk Slots; 17 to 52: Virtual Extension Slots)
• ZZ: Port number
– For optional service cards:
The port number (01 to XX) will be displayed.

When X=5
• YY: Process code
• ZZ: Process number (determined by each process)
Note
When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZ will
be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for the mother board = "01 10000"
Error Message A description of the error.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

114 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information:
• Type: Describes the type of system event.
• Date: The date and time the system event occurred.
• Message: Details about the system event.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 115

7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log

7.3.3 Utility—Log—Web-MC Event Log

The Web-MC Event Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description

Date The date of the event.

Time The time of the event.
User The account name of the user accessing Web Maintenance Console.
Description A description of the action taken by the user. (i.e. "Login to
Web-MC")
IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance Console.

To save the event log as a text file

1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Save.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.
To clear the event log
1. From the Web-MC Event Log screen, select Clear.
Note
Users logged in to a Master unit can see all events. Users logged in to a Slave unit can only view the events
for that unit.

116 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click OK to export a UM System Log file.
2. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 117

7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace

7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace

7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace

This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI or PRI cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target BRI or PRI card be
set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The
displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace
shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.

To view trace data

1. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
2. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

118 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace

7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace

This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be
set to INS status.

To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card (file name: "PRTH323").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 119

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace

The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW16 card and saved to a PC using the
V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace.
This option requires that the target V-SIPGW16 card be set to INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to trace and file V-SIPGW16 card protocol activity:

To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the tree menu, select V-SIPGW16 Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card (file name: "PRTSIPC").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

120 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor

7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor

This utility monitors the status of CSs. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised
with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows:

Item Description

CS Type Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.

Slot Type Slot type of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Port Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS / Repeater Indicates whether the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with is a
CS or Repeater.
CS Name Name of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS ID 12-digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Monitored Value Monitored value (dBm) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised
with.
Monitored Level Monitored level (signal strength level) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired Air Synchronisation
Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of air synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

PC Programming Manual 121

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace

This screen displays trace information for faxes sent and received by the PBX’s FAX Card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received:
• Date/Time
• Status
• Mode
• Resolution
• Speed
• Remote Capacity
• Local Capacity
To save a copy of the recorded information, click Save Trace and follow the prompts.

122 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace

7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace

This screen displays a log of events related to fax activity.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
To save a copy of the log, click Save Trace and follow the prompts.

PC Programming Manual 123

7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports:
• DTMF / Dial: data regarding DTMF signals received by the Unified Messaging system.
• Guidance: guidance data that the Unified Messaging system played.
• Message: Unified Messaging system activity for messages such as creating, playing and deleting.
• Process Event: events occurred between Unified Messaging system processes such as Application, Call
Processor and DSP.
• Caller ID: received Caller ID information.
• DID: received DID numbers.
• PIN: PINs received by the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data.
1. Select Internal Trace, Display, or Trace Clear.
– Setting
1. Check Enable / Disable Trace Data.
2. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
3. Click OK.
– Display: Displays the trace data and/or error data.
1. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
2. To include error data, click the Error Trace tab and check Error Data.
3. Click OK.
4. The selected data will be displayed in a new window. Click the Trace Data or Error Trace tabs to
switch views. Click Save Log File to save a copy of the displayed data.
5. Click Cancel when finished.
– Trace Clear: Clears saved trace data.
1. Select the trace data to clear.
2. Click OK to clear the selected trace data.
3. The message "System Trace Clear Successful" will be displayed. Click OK to continue.

124 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report

7.5 Utility—Report

7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report

Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period
selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being
used, and the distance from the telephone company.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Time Time of error

Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Trunk Out of SYNC (#300) Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Error Logs logged in
"Minor Error" Log RAI (#301) Digital trunk RAI signal reception
AIS (#302) Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Counter of minor CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
communication error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information

1. From the Slot drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
2. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
3. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 125

7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, V-IPEXT32 cards, V-IPCS4 cards, and the
DSP card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description

Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.
Port No. Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.

To view IP extension information

1. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card.
2. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
4. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

126 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports
can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To view a report
1. In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
2. Specify a range of mailbox numbers in the From and To boxes, or click Select all mailboxes.
3. Click View Report.
Some reports can be viewed as a table or as a graph. For these reports, select "Table" or "Graph" under
View As before clicking View Report.

To export a report
A report can be printed from Web Maintenance Console or exported as a text file or CSV file.
1. When viewing a report, select Print Out (PC), Text, or Comma-separated values (CSV) from the
drop-down menu.
2. Click Export.
3. If you select Print Out (PC):
A print command is sent to the PC. Follow any prompts to print the report.
If you select Text or Comma-separated values (CSV):
A file save dialogue is displayed. Specify the folder to export the report file to.

To clear a report
For each report, all data can be cleared. Follow the steps below to clear all report data. Some reports can also
be set to automatically clear at specified times.
1. Select the Report Data Clear (Manual) tab.
2. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
3. Click Report Data Clear.

To automatically clear report data:

1. Select the Report Data Clear (Scheduled) tab.
2. Select Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and specify the time, the day of week or day of month, and the
month, as necessary.
3. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
4. Click OK.
Note
For scheduling the Automatic Report Data Clear, if a day is specified that does not exist (i.e., February 31),
the Automatic Report Data Clear will not be performed.

Unified Messaging System Reports

Report Type Description

Mailbox Information Report The mailbox information report displays configuration parameters
(from owner’s extension to e-mail options) for a specified mailbox
or a range of mailboxes. 50 records are displayed at a time for this
report.

PC Programming Manual 127

7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Report Type Description

Call Account Report*1 The call account report displays information about outgoing call
activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox. The
report includes date, starting time, used port, connection time,
called telephone number, call type, exit status of each callout, total
callouts number and the connection time for local or long distance
call, and total number of outgoing calls. 400 records are displayed
at a time for this report.
UM Extn. Usage Report*1 The port usage report displays information about each UM port,
such as connection time and percentage of time which each UM
port was busy.
Memory Card Usage Report*1 The memory usage report indicates the amount of storage space
used and the amount of available space. Available space is
expressed in minutes. Information for the number of messages
stored in and deleted from the Unified Messaging system is
displayed.
Mailbox Usage Report*1 The mailbox usage report displays information for a specified
mailbox or range of mailboxes, including the number of recorded
messages, the total time of outgoing calls, external messages,
message notification, group message delivery, and number of
faxes received.
• Specify the mailboxes for which you want to display a report,
then click View Report.
• Items not marked as "current" are accumulated indications
since the last clearing of this report.
100 records are displayed at a time for this report.
Fax Transfer Report*1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received
by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax
extension. It includes the fax reception date, the port number used,
and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax messages.
Fax Server Report The fax server report displays the log of all sent and received
faxes. The report includes the user name or mailbox number that
sent or received the fax, number of pages of the fax document,
and the result of the fax transmission or reception.
Call Handling Statistic Report*1 The call handling statistic report displays both a summary of and
details of Unified Messaging activity over a specified period of time
for the Automated Attendant service. This report includes the total
number of incoming calls, transferred calls, held calls, calls which
left a message, the result of transferred calls, etc.
Custom Service Report*1 The Custom Service report displays information such as Custom
Service settings, message recording status, number of access,
time of access, and number of access to each key.
Message Status Report The message status report provides the status of all messages of
specified subscribers, including faxes.
Subscriber Setup Report The subscriber setup report displays the basic settings (owner’s
name, password, personal greeting, etc.) for a specified mailbox
or range of mailboxes.

128 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Report Type Description

Security Information Report The security information report displays information about mailbox
accesses. The report includes the date of the last change and last
access, number of total accesses, login, and failed accesses.
Hourly Statistics Report*1 The hourly statistics report displays information about the number
of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per hour, etc.
*1
This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings.

PC Programming Manual 129

7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

7.5.4 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail
Report.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent:
• User name under which the message was sent
• Unified Messaging mailbox number
• Time sent
• Destination e-mail address
• Sending status of the e-mail message

The maximum number of entries included in the report is as follows, depending on the type of the message:
• Voice mail or fax message notifications: 5,000 entries
• Missed call notifications: 1,000 entries
• Other e-mail messages (system messages, etc.): 1,000 entries
Note
Messages sent by the PBX, such as system alerts, will list the user as "System" and the mailbox number
as "—".
If these maximum amounts are exceeded, older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be
deleted as new entries are recorded.To delete all e-mail report records, click Delete all E-mail report.

Exporting the E-mail Report

1. Select an export format from the drop-down list.
2. Click Export.
3. A download dialogue for the e-mail report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the file to the
PC.

130 PC Programming Manual

 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are copied
from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
2. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
3. The activation keys will be copied to the Master unit, and then copied to the Slave units of the One-look
network. When installation is complete, the message, "The activation key has been installed and activated
successfully!" is displayed.
4. Click OK.
Note
You can click the provided link to directly access 9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—
Activation Key to view activation key information and programme the number of activated IP-GW trunks
and IP softphones.

PC Programming Manual 131

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert

You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status.

System Alarm
An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message
will contain details about the alarm.
1. For Filtering Setting, select the check boxes to specify whether to receive e-mails when there is a Major
alarm, a Minor alarm, or both.
2. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive system alarm alert messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when there is a system alarm, or information regarding the PBX may be sent unintentionally
to a third party.
3. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
4. Click OK when finished.
Licence Expiry
When activation keys that are registered to the PBX and have a limited duration are about to expire, an e-mail
message can be sent to the specified addresses. When 10 days remain in the duration of a registered activation
key, the e-mail will be sent.
1. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive expiry notice messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when activation keys are about to expire, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
2. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
3. Click OK when finished.

132 PC Programming Manual

 7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address.
2. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
3. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
4. Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time.

PC Programming Manual 133

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
3. Click Execute. A test mail will be sent to the specified address(es).
Mail settings can be viewed and set in 27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP.

134 PC Programming Manual

 7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command

7.8 Utility—Command

7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command

System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

PC Programming Manual 135

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The
programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following categories of system prompts can be customised from the System Prompts customisation
screen:
a. System Guidance
b. Custom Service Menus
c. Company Greetings
d. Other
– Company Name
– Language Select Menu
– Hold Announce Menu
– Mailbox Group List
– System Caller ID
To customise system prompts, select a tab in the System Prompts dialogue box.

Notice
The system prompts initially installed on the Storage Memory Card cannot be restored to their original state
by initialising or resetting the PBX; any changes made to the initially installed system prompts cannot be
undone. Before changing any system prompts, perform a backup of the initial system prompt data. See
6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup for details. Then, you can restore the system prompts to their initial state by
restoring the backup data. See 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore for details.

Deleting Prompts
The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts.
To delete a specific system prompt:
1. Select the cell for the desired prompt number.
2. Click Delete.
Recording System Prompts
1. Select the desired system prompt to record, and click Play/Record.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click OK.

136 PC Programming Manual

 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback

1. Select the desired system prompts.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.

PC Programming Manual 137

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting

7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor

Setting
Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent
extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. Click Add/Delete.
2. Select supervisor extensions from the list, and click OK.
3. Repeat this procedure to add multiple supervisors. Click OK when finished.

138 PC Programming Manual

 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic
Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
2. In UM Group Destination Mailbox specify the mailbox where the Automatic Two-way Recording data will
be sent. Select Add New Mailbox and specify a new mailbox number, or select an existing mailbox from
the Select Mailbox drop-down list.
3. Select a UM group from the Assign a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list to specify the UM Group
of the mailbox specified in 2.
4. In What type of calls to record, check the boxes to specify if internal calls, external calls, and/or calls
made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox.
5. In Select User Extensions, click Add.
6. Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control, and then click OK.
7. Click List View to confirm the current Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervised
extension.
8. Click OK when you have finished configuring settings and adding agent extensions for a supervisor.
Once these settings have been configured, supervisors can change settings for agent extensions they have
been assigned in 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording.

PC Programming Manual 139

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

List
In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the Automatic
Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM Group
number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. For an extension, select a setting for Internal Call, External Call, and ICDG Incoming Only. (See below
for details.)
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.
3. Click OK when finished.
The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Internal Call
Specifies whether intercom calls for the extension will be automatically recorded.

Value Range
On, Off

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

140 PC Programming Manual

 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

External Call
Specifies whether trunk calls for the extension are automatically recorded.

Value Range
On, Off

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

ICDG Incoming Only

Specifies whether only trunk calls that are received through an incoming call distribution group to the extension
are automatically recorded.

Value Range
On, Off

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Supervisor
Indicates the extension designated as a supervisor that may play, delete, or confirm the information of two-way
recordings (reference only).

Value Range
Extension number and user name

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Programming Manual References

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting

PC Programming Manual 141

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

UM Group No.
Indicates the UM group number in which the two-way recording will be performed (reference only).

Value Range
Group number and group name

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

PC Programming Manual References

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Mailbox Number
Indicates the Unified Messaging mailbox where two-way recordings will be stored (reference only).

Value Range
Mailbox number

Maintenance Console Location

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

PC Programming Manual References

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

142 PC Programming Manual

 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time by
a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop.
Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs:
• The Stop button is clicked.
• The two-way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached.
• The date and time set in Recording Period is reached.
2. To set a specific time when Automatic Two-way Recording will stop:
a. In Recording Period, select Yes for Setting.
b. In Date & Time, enter a year, month, day, hour, and minute. Click on the calendar and clock numbers
to select them.
c. Click OK.
3. To end Automatic Two-way Recording any time, click Stop.

PC Programming Manual 143

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance.

System Maintenance Mode

Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode.

System Maintenance Start Time

Specifies the System Maintenance start time.

After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.

144 PC Programming Manual

 Section 8
Users

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 145

8.1 Users—User Profiles

8.1 Users—User Profiles

Manage PBX settings on a per-user level. Information for each user account is displayed and can be added,
edited, or and deleted by a User (Administrator) or Installer level account.

Note
For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must use
the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User Profiles
screen. For details, see 6.8 Tool—Screen Customise.
The settings that can be changed in the User Profile List for each user are as follows:

Common

Item Description

First Name Specifies the first name of the user.

Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
User Group Specifies the user’s group.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Ext. No. Specifies the extension number associated with this user.
Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
Ext. COS Select a Class of Service (COS) for the user from the drop-down list.
COS settings can be set in 10.7 PBX Configuration—System—Class of
Service.
UM Group No. Select a UM group for the user from the drop-down list.
Mailbox No. Specifies the UM mailbox number for the user.
Mailbox COS Select a mailbox COS for the user from the drop-down list. Mailbox COS settings
can be set in 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service.

FWD/DND

Item Description

First Name Specifies the first name of the user.

Last Name Specifies the last name of the user.
FWD/DND setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from trunks.
Mode
FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from trunks.
Destination
FWD/DND setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls from extensions.
Mode

146 PC Programming Manual

 8.1 Users—User Profiles

Item Description

FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Destination

For settings and details for FWD/DND items, refer to the following:
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND
Note
When a User (User) level account accesses this screen, he may view and edit items for his account as
explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings are available
for User (User) level accounts only. For details, see 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting.

User Controls
• Add Button
To add a user profile for a single extension, click the button to open the Add User Wizard. See
8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Edit Button
To edit information on an individual user level, select a user from the list by clicking on the row of the user
to edit, then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user’s information filled
in. See 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User.
• Delete Button
To delete users:
1. Check the box(es) next to the user’s name(s) and click the button.
2. A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.
3. The user’s information is deleted from the list.
• Add Range Button
To add multiple user profiles for a range of extensions at one time, click the button. See 8.2.2 Users
—Add User—Multiple Users.

Note
• In order to edit the settings of the Unified Message tab by clicking the button, you must be logged
in to the PBX with the associated UM Group that your mailbox is assigned to. If you are logged in to a
PBX that is different from the PBX with the associated UM Group of your mailbox, the following items
will be greyed out:
– Prompt Registration
– Mailbox Password
– Mailbox Password (Message client)
– Advanced setting
If these items are greyed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM
Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items.
• The , , and buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts.

PC Programming Manual 147

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

When User (User) level accounts access their user profiles, they may view and edit items for their account as
explained in 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User. In addition, some advanced settings can also be
programmed by users.

Note
The advanced settings described here are displayed only for User (User) level accounts.

Accessing advanced user profile settings

1. Log in Web Maintenance Console using a User (User) level account.
2. In the user profile, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click the Advanced setting button.
4. In addition to normal mailbox settings, Advanced Call Transfer Setting and Scenario Setting will be
displayed.

Advanced Call Transfer Setting

By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling, you can create a call handling
"scenario" for your extension. Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each
absent message. Click the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open the window for
programming. Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down menu, then programme the settings for
that scenario. Click OK at the bottom of the window when finished.

Scenario Name
Specify a name for the scenario for identification.

Value Range
Max. 32 Characters

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Selection

Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the selected scenario.

Value Range
None: Rings the subscriber’s extension.
Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the
subscriber’s extension. The subscriber’s extension will not ring.
Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name. The Unified Messaging system then calls
the subscriber and plays back the caller name. The subscriber can choose whether to answer the call.
Intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to Mailbox: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

148 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu

Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu" is selected
for Call Transfer Status—Selection.

Value Range
Custom Service

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

PC Programming Manual References

23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number - 1

If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, specifying a telephone
number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number.

Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is
transferred.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #)

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

PC Programming Manual 149

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5

(Selection/Other)
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Call Transfer Status—Selection, and the call could not be
transfered to the number specified in Call Transfer Status—Transfer to specified telephone number -
1, the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.

Note
• This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in
24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Alternate
Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).
• If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the
call is transferred.

Value Range
Other, Extension, Covering Extension
If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , and #.

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer

Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer.

Note
More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to the top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the the destination is busy.

150 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Note
More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Maintenance Console Location

8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Scenario Setting
You can select scenarios set in 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting for your extension. A
scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message setting
of the extension of the subscriber. (® 14.5 PBX Configuration—Feature—Absent Message)
Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely. A scenario set here will be
used regardless of the subscriber’s extension status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the indicated Absent Message is set at the
extension.

PC Programming Manual 151

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

8.2 Users—Add User

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

The Add User—Single User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on
a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be displayed
with information already entered when editing an existing user.

Note
User (User) level accounts may access this screen to edit their account information, but only the items
marked with a "*".

User Information

Item Description

First Name* Specifies the first name of the user (max 20 characters).
Last Name* Specifies the last name of the user (max 20 characters).
Change Language* Select the Web Maintenance Console language displayed for the user from the
drop-down list. Users may select different display languages without affecting
the display of other users.
Site name Select a PBX site from the drop-down list for the account.
Department Specifies a department description of up to 64 characters.
Section Specifies a section description of up to 64 characters.
User Group Select a User Group from the drop-down list.
User groups can be set in Extension Settings:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension
Settings
User Level Select a User Level from the drop-down list.
• The Installer level account may select User (User) or User (Administrator)
levels.
• User (Administrator) level accounts may only select the User (User) level.

Contact

Item Description

Extension No. Select an extension for the user from the drop-down list.
Device Displays the device type of the selected extension.
Extension PIN* Specifies the user’s extension PIN.
DDI Specifies the user’s Direct Dial In (DDI) number.
Fax* Specifies the user’s fax number.
Phone (Home)* Specifies the user’s home telephone phone number.
Phone (Mobile)* Specifies the user’s mobile telephone phone number.

152 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

Item Description

Email 1–3* Specifies the user’s e-mail address(es).

Unified Message

Item Description

UM Group No. Select a UM group for the user from the drop-down list.
Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user.
Class of Service Select a COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)
Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The
following prompts can be recorded in this screen:
• Mailbox owner name
• Personal greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting,
Temporary Greeting and Absent Message)
• Interview mailbox questions
• Personal caller ID name
• Personal distribution list voice label
To record a prompt
Select a prompt number and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then
click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click Upload.
6. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.
4. Click OK.
To delete a specific prompt
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK.
Mailbox Password* Click to specify the password for the mailbox.
Mailbox Password Click to specify the messaging client password for the mailbox.
(Message client)*

PC Programming Manual 153

8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

Item Description

Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—
Mailbox Settings.

Note
When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items
are displayed. See 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting.

Email Notification

Item Description

Email notification for If Enable is selected, the user will receive an e-mail at the address(es) specified
missed call* in Email 1–3 in the Contact tab when a trunk call is missed.

Telephony Feature

Item Description

Class of Service Select the COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for trunk calls.
Disturb—For external For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD/DND settings for extension calls.
Disturb—For internal For the FWD destination, Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in
calls* the Contact tab), or a manually input number can be specified.
Speed Dialling View/ Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen. The appropriate screen (wired
Edit* extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user.
Flexible Button View/ Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen. The appropriate screen
Edit* (wired extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user.

Login Account

Item Description

Login ID Set a login ID for the user. (4-16 characters in length)

Note
Login IDs must be unique for each user.
Password* Set a password for the user. (4-16 characters in length)
Re-enter* Re-enter the password for confirmation.
Change Language Select the language displayed in Web Maintenance Console for the Installer
level account from the drop-down list. A different display language can be used
without affecting the display of other user accounts.

Note
This item is displayed only when logged in using the Installer level account.

154 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User

When all relevant information has been set, click OK to add or reflect changes to the user account.

Note
If the user changes any of their own settings, they will be applied to the user the next time they log into
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 155

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

8.2.2 Users—Add User—Multiple Users

The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple user profiles for a range of
extensions at one time.
1. In the From and To fields, specify the range of extensions to create profiles for.
2. Select the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box if you want to create
Unified Messaging mailboxes whose mailbox numbers are the same as the assigned extension numbers.
3. If you choose to create mailboxes in step 3, select where the mailboxes will be created:
• Create mailboxes to the UM group of the PBX where extensions belong to:
The mailbox for each extension will be created in the UM group of the site (PBX) to which the extension
is assigned.

Note
When this setting is selected, mailboxes for PS extensions will be created in the UM group of the
Master unit.
• Create mailboxes to the specified UM group:
Mailboxes for the extensions will be created in the UM group that you select from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK.
For each user profile added this way, the following information is automatically assigned:
• First Name: "Ext." + the extension number for the user (e.g., "Ext.101")
• Last Name: The information entered in Extension Name for the extension in Section 12 PBX
Configuration—Extension
• Login ID: The extension number (i.e., if the extension is "101", the Login ID for the user will also be
"101")
• Password: "PWD" + the extension number for the user (e.g., "PWD101")
Note
• When OK is clicked, if any extensions within the range specified in step 2 already have user accounts
associated with them, the process will not complete, and an error message will be displayed.
• If the Create mailboxes with the same number as the extensions check box is selected and a
mailbox number has already been assigned to another extension, the user profile will be created without
a UM mailbox assigned to it.
• The value specified for Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8) in 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System
Parameters—Parameters must be equal to or greater than the number of digits for the specified
extensions.

156 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording

8.3 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording

This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

8.3.1 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording

On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. For an extension, click the setting for Internal Call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.
3. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 157

8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

8.3.2 Users—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list.
2. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
3. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
4. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that match
those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Call Type: Specify the type of call that was recorded.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or trunk calls.
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
3. Click the button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to Web
Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
4. Click the button.

Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the button will be disabled. Select a specific
mailbox to enable the button.
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at which
to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step 1, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.

158 PC Programming Manual

 Section 9
PBX Configuration—Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 159

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary
of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 9.2 PBX Configuration
—Configuration—Slot—Summary).

To switch between physical and virtual shelves of the PBX

1. To view the virtual card shelf, click Virtual.
2. To return to the physical card view, click Physical while in the virtual card shelf view.

To install a new physical card to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed, and information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To add new virtual cards to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install at the top.
2. Select the number of cards to install of that type from the Total number of cards drop-down list. An
according number of cards will fill free virtual slots.

To access card properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.

To remove a card from the PBX

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click OK to confirm.
The card will be removed.

160 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Note
When deleting a physical combination card, both cards must be set to OUS before selecting Delete.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To access IP-PT port properties

1. When you place the mouse cursor over the IP Phone Registration button on the Slot screen, the following
choices appear. Click an option to open a port properties programming screen:

IP-PT: For KX-NT300 series and KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later) IP-PTs
(® 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property)

SIP-MLT: For KX-UT series SIP phones

(® 9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property)

Standard SIP Phone: For third party SIP Phones

(® 9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property)

Option: Opens the Site Property—Main screen.

(® 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main)

PC Programming Manual 161

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Supported Card Types

Card Maximum Number/PBX Card Programming

LCOT2+SLC2: A combination card

including:
• 2 analogue trunk ports
• 2 extension ports for SLTs LCOT2:
9.23 PBX Configuration—
BRI4+SLC2: A combination card Configuration—Slot—Card Property
including: - LCO type
• 4 ISDN Basic Rate Interface ports
• 2 extension ports for SLTs SLC2:
PRI30+SLC2: A combination card 9.21 PBX Configuration—
1
including: Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port Property
(30B channels).
• 2 extension ports for SLTs BRI/PRI:
9.25 PBX Configuration—
PRI23+SLC2: A combination card Configuration—Slot—Card Property
including: - BRI type/PRI type
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port
(23B channels).
• 2 extension ports for SLTs
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP 9.13 PBX Configuration—
Extension Card 4 Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—
Card Property
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP 9.15 PBX Configuration—
Extension Card 20 Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32
—Card Property
V-UTEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP 9.19 PBX Configuration—
Proprietary Telephone Card 20 Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32
—Card Property
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP 9.11 PBX Configuration—
Gateway Card 3 Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—
Shelf Property
V-SIPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel SIP 9.11 PBX Configuration—
Trunk Card 16 Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—
Shelf Property
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station 9.17 PBX Configuration—
Interface Card 16 Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—
Card Property

For more information on the virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the Installation
Manual:
→ 4.4 Virtual Cards
→ 4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards

162 PC Programming Manual

 9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Click Physical Shelf or Virtual Shelf to switch between viewing information for the Physical and Virtual slots.

Physical Shelf
Site
Indicates the site number of the PBX where the card is installed (reference only).

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position of the card (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical)

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Slot
Indicates the slot number (reference only).

Value Range
1–3

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

PC Programming Manual 163

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Card Type
Indicates the service cards installed in the slots of the physical shelf (reference only).

Value Range
Card Type:
SLC2: SLC2 card of an installed LCOT2+SLC2, BRI4+SLC2, PRI30+SLC2, or PRI23+SLC2 card
LCOT2: LCOT2 card of an installed LCOT2+SLC2 card
BRI4: BRI4 card of an installed BRI4+SLC2 card
PRI23: PRI23 card of an installed PRI23+SLC2 card
PRI30: PRI30 card of an installed PRI30+SLC2 card
DOORPHONE: DOORPHONE Card

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot
9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property
9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type
9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Status
Indicates the card status (reference only)

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
IDLE: No card is installed in the slot.

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Version
Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

164 PC Programming Manual

 9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Virtual Shelf
Site
Indicates the site number of the PBX where the card is installed (reference only).

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type of the card (reference only).

Value Range
Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Slot
Indicates the slot number of the virtual card (reference only).

Value Range
31–82

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Slot Type
Indicates the type of card slot (reference only).

Value Range
Trunk, Extension

PC Programming Manual 165

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Card Type
Indicates the type of virtual card installed (reference only).

Value Range
V-SIPGW16, V-IPGW16, V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPCS4, V-UTEXT32

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.

Maintenance Console Location

9.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

166 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

Activation Key
Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files on the Storage
Memory Card and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board.
It is possible to programme how the number of available IP Trunk channels is to be divided for H.323 and SIP
trunks. In Number of activated IP-GW, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 trunks.
The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.

Note
If you have changed the value for Number of activated IP-GW, you must click Execute to restart the
V-IPGW16 cards for the change to take effect.
Similarly, you can programme how many IP softphones can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. In Number of activated IP-Softphone, type the number of IP softphones to be used
through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. The remainder is the number of IP-PTs that
can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. By default, only IP softphones
can be used.
You can click the Activation Key Installation link to access the Activation Key Installation screen (see
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation) for installing activation keys.

Trial Activation Keys

The PBX includes free trials for some PBX features that normally require activation keys. The trials have a
60-day limit. To begin using the free trials:
1. Click Activate Pre-installed Activation keys. A list of trial activation keys is displayed.
2. Select the check boxes next to the trial activation keys you want to activate.
3. Click OK.
The trial period for the selected trial activation keys will begin.

Trial activation keys:

• One-look Network
• Two-way Recording Control
• Message Backup
• UM/E-mail (128 user)
• Two-Way Recording (30 users)
• Mobile Extension (30 users)
• CA PRO (128 users)
• CA Supervisor (1 user)
• CA Operator Console (1 user)
• CA Thin Client Server
• CSTA Multiplexer

MPR-ID
Indicates the ID number of the mother board (reference only).

Value Range
ID number of the mother board

Maintenance Console Location

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

PC Programming Manual 167

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

Activated Feature
Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only).
Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the
documentation for CA.

Value Range
IP Phone Capacity (ch): IP Phone Activation up to system maximum capacity.
IP Trunk (ch): IP Trunk Activation Key
IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone (ch): IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
SIP Extension (ch): SIP Extension Activation Key
One-look Network: Activation key for One-look networking
QSIG Network: Activation key for QSIG network
Recording Time Expansion: Activation key for recording time expansion
Two-way Recording Control: Activation key for two-way recording control
Message Backup: Activation key for message backup
UM Port (ch): Activation key for Unified Messaging ports
UM/E-mail (user): Activation key for Unified Messaging Email Client
Two-way Recording (user): Activation key for two-way recording
CTI interface: Activation key for 3rd Party CTI link
CSTA Multiplexer: Activation key for CSTA Multiplexer
Mobile Extension (user): Activation key for Mobile Extension users
CA Basic (No limit): Activation Key for CA Basic-Express
CA Pro (user): Activation Key for CA Pro
CA Supervisor (user): Activation Key for CA ICD Group Monitor
CA Network Feature (user): Activation Key for CA network features
CA Operator Console (user): Activation Key for CA Operator Console
CA Thin Client Server: Activation Key for CA Thin Client Server

Maintenance Console Location

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

Pre-installed
Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board (reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

Activation Key
Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by activation key files on the Storage Memory Card
(reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

168 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

Maintenance Console Location

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

Features in total
Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the mother board and activation key files on
the Storage Memory Card (reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

System Total
Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by activation keys in the One-look network.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

9.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Activation Key

PC Programming Manual 169

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

System Property
The properties of the PBX system can be specified.

Main
DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension)
Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW)

Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for IP trunk calls.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

DSP CODEC Priority-1 value only (others)

Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls:
• IP extension calls
• SIP trunk calls
Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

System Speed Dial Download For UT Extensions

Specifies the maximum number of system speed dial entries that will be downloaded to KX-UT series SIP
phones.

Value Range
0–300

170 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Programming Manual References

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property—Option— System Speed Dial
Download

System Status
CPU Usage
Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, expressed as a percentage of total capacity.

Value Range
1–100% (reference only)

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Memory Usage
Displays the amount of system memory currently being used, displayed as a percentage of total capacity.

Value Range
1–100% (reference only)

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Multisite
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

DTMF
Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)

PC Programming Manual 171

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

Value Range
96–127

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Multisite message resend time

Specifies the re-sending time for message communication between the Master unit and Slave units.

Value Range
500–8000 ms, in units of 500 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Multisite message resend expired time

Specifies the number of seconds after which a message being re-sent between the Master unit and Slave units
will timeout if it cannot be sent.

Value Range
150–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Multisite for PBX UDP port number

Specifies the first of two contiguous UDP ports to be used for Type 1 message communication between the
Master unit and Slave units.

Note
The UDP port specified here and the next contiguous port will be assigned for transmission.
Example: If the value set here is 4560, ports 4560 and 4561 will be assigned.

Value Range
1024–65534

172 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Multisite message UDP port number

Specifies the UDP port to be used for Type 2 message communication between the Master unit and Slave
units.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Multisite Keepalive Time-out time

Specifies the Keep Alive Time-Out time for communication between the Master unit and Slave units.

Value Range
10–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

V-IPGW
Call Signalling Model
Specifies whether to carry out a call control (H.225) process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper.

Value Range
Direct, GateKeeper

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s)

Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
0 (disabled), 1–1440

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

PC Programming Manual 173

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Terminal type to gatekeeper

Specifies the connection service type notified to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
Terminal, Gateway

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Gatekeeper ID to gatekeeper
Specifies the authentication ID notified to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
Max. 20 Characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Bandwidth to gatekeeper
Specifies the used bandwidth information notified to the gatekeeper.

Value Range
1–255 kbps

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Primary Gatekeeper IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Primary Gatekeeper Port Number

Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1–65535

174 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number

Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

H.225 Port Number

Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol suite.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

RAS Port Number

Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number

Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations
in a QSIG network.

PC Programming Manual 175

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number

Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations
in a QSIG network.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

H.323 Dynamic Port Number

Specifies the starting port number from which 448 contiguous ports are used as dynamic ports.

Value Range
1–65000

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW Settings–Main
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

176 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW Group
Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of 256 gateway
groups can be created.

Value Range
1–256, None

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Connection for IP-GW16

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA IP-GW
cards.

Value Range
Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA)

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Protocol
Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in
a QSIG network.

Value Range
TCP, UDP

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Progress Tone Send Mode

Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones
are audible at the destination.

Value Range
External, Internal

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

PC Programming Manual 177

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW Settings–Option 1
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd

Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or
G.711Mu for 1st priority.

Value Range
For 1st:
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

For 2nd and 3rd:

None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

178 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW Settings–Option 2
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Voice Activity Detection for G.711

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

PC Programming Manual 179

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Programming Manual References

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property—GW Settings–Option 1— IP Codec Priority
—1st, 2nd, 3rd

DTMF
Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

Value Range
96–127

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

180 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW Settings–Option 3
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

PC Programming Manual 181

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

DN2IP
Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination.

Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

Remaining Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following the leading number to access the destination.

Value Range
0–29

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW No./GW Group Selection

Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group.

Value Range
GW Group, GW No.

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

182 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW Group
Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.

Value Range
1–256

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

GW No.
Specifies the number of the destination gateway device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW No..

Value Range
1–512

Maintenance Console Location

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property

PC Programming Manual 183

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site

Property
The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the Site Property
button, Main, FAX Card, and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen.

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—

Main
Overall settings for the PBX site can be specified.

Main
Storage Memory Size
Indicates the size of the installed storage memory card (reference only).

Value Range
None, Card Size

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Multisite Connection Ability

Specifies whether the PBX may connect to other PBX sites as part of a One-look network.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the site.

Value Range
1–256

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

184 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

IP Terminal Registration Mode

Specifies the IP terminal registration mode for registering IP telephones to the PBX.

Value Range
Manual, Full Automatic, Extension Input

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Programming Manual References

2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

VoIP-DSP Options
The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks.

IP Extension Count of BGM

Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the mother board can send out BGM.

Value Range
0–117

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Echo Cancellation Ports

Specifies the number of ports to be used for echo cancellation.

PC Programming Manual 185

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value Range
0–64

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 FAX

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using the G.711 codec.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

186 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice

Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications.

Value Range
1000–65530 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

PC Programming Manual 187

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX

Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications.

Value Range
1000–65530 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DTMF Detection Level for G.711A

Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A codec.

Value Range
-45– -12 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DTMF Detection Level for G.711Mu

Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711Mu codec.

Value Range
-39– -6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.

188 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value Range
20–5000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
1–3

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern

Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CED Signal Fixation Detection Time

Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected
by the PBX.

Value Range
50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

PC Programming Manual 189

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) A-Law

Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711A.

Value Range
-13–2 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) Mu-Law

Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711Mu.

Value Range
-7–8 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

VoIP-DSP Options 2
The settings in this tab relate to communications within a One-look network.

Echo Cancellation Ability

Specifies the echo cancellation ability time.

Value Range
64 ms, 128 ms, Off

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

190 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A

Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec.

PC Programming Manual 191

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
0–200 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice

Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications.

Value Range
1000–65530 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

192 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Port Number
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the system to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, the system uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.

Value Range
1024–64000

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

PC Programming Manual 193

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT / SIP-MLT)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server

Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

LOGIN Port Number

Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

194 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

CTI Port Number

Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

2.26 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features

Built-in Communication Assistant Server

Specifies the port number for the Communication Assistant (CA) application.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in
Communication Assistant
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in
Communication Assistant

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

LAN Status
LINK for Main Port
Indicates the current connection status of the main port (reference only).

Value Range
1: Disconnect, 0: Connect

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

LINK for Maintenance Port

Indicates the current connection status of the MNT port (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 195

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value Range
1: Disconnect, 0: Connect

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

SIP Extension
SIP Location Hold Time Max.
Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
10–3600 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP Location Hold Time Min.

Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
10–3600 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP Location Hold Time Interval

Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1–10 s

196 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP Session Timer Min.

Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no
communication is detected.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
90–3600 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Echo Cancellation
The settings in this tab are for non-IP calls.

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

PC Programming Manual 197

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Conference
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-IPEXT side for conference
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-IPEXT card.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-SIPEXT side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-SIPEXT
card.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

198 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on V-UTEXT side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V-UTEXT
card.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Multisite GW side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using a gateway between sites.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Echo Cancellation Ability on TDM side for conference

Specifies the echo canceller ability time for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up) on TDM side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

PC Programming Manual 199

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

DSP Digital Gain (Down) on TDM side for conference

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode
communication.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

EC Gain on TDM side for conference

Specifies the error correction gain for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

NLP Setting on TDM side for conference

Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

200 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card

9.5.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—

FAX Card
Information and settings for the FAX Card for the PBX site can be confirmed and specified.

Status
Indicates if a FAX Card is installed in the PBX (reference only).

Value Range
Installed, None

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Version
Indicates the version of the FAX Card firmware (reference only).

Value Range
Version Number

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

FAX Extension number

Specifies the extension number assigned to the FAX Card for making and receiving faxes directly from the
PBX.

Value Range
Extension number

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

PC Programming Manual 201

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—

NSVM
Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified.

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

202 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
1–3

PC Programming Manual 203

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern

Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Maximum Silence Time

Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.

Value Range
1000–60000 (ms)

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Maximum Continuous Tone Time (0-60 s)

Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.

Value Range
1000–60000 (ms)

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Unique Cyclic Tone Detection

Specifies whether the system will detect the end of a call when there is a unique cyclic tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Maximum Cyclic Tone Time

Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call.

204 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.3 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM

Value Range
1000–60000 (ms)

Maintenance Console Location

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

PC Programming Manual 205

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM

Card Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified.

Main
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

206 PC Programming Manual

 9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.

Value Range
20–5000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter

Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.

Value Range
1–3

PC Programming Manual 207

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern

Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

9.6 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Card Property

208 PC Programming Manual

 9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM

Port Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified.

Main
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot–To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode only)

UM Group Number
Selects the number of the UM group.

PC Programming Manual 209

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

210 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-SIPGW—Shelf Property
Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.

Icon Description for Parameter Type

Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.

Manual programming is optional.

Main
SIP Client Port Number
Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the SIP server.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

NAT Traversal
Specifies the NAT traversal method.
– STUN: A STUN Server, used alongside the SIP Server, finds out the global IP address of the router with
NAT enabled.
– Fixed IP Addr.: The global IP address of the router with NAT enabled is fixed.
Note
Manual programming is optional except when programming is required depending on the network
conditions.

Value Range
Off, Fixed IP Addr., STUN

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

NAT - Voice (RTP) UDP Port No.

Specifies the starting port number of the dynamic ports used for NAT Traversal.

Value Range
1024–65535

PC Programming Manual 211

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in order to maintain the NAT binding information. This setting
may be compulsory depending on the network conditions.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

NAT - Keep Alive Packet Type

Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out.

Value Range
Blank UDP, None

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

NAT - Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval

Specifies the interval time until the next Keep Alive packet is sent.

Note
It is required to set this interval shorter than the NAT binding time of the router. The default value is
appropriate in most cases.

Value Range
1–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

NAT - Fixed Global IP Address

Specifies the global IP address of the router with NAT enabled. This setting is compulsory if Fixed IP Addr.
is selected in NAT Traversal.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

212 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

STUN Ability
Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the STUN server to enable STUN feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

STUN Client Port Number

Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the STUN server.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

STUN External Address Detection Retry Counter

Specifies the number of times that a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server.

Value Range
0–8

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

STUN Resending Interval

Specifies the length of time until a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server.

Value Range
0–1600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP Called Party Number Check Ability

Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk call when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target
SIP-URI. The setting specified here is also applied when the request header is blank or contains characters
that cannot be modified to a receivable number.

Value Range
Disable (High->Low), Disable (Low->High), Enable

PC Programming Manual 213

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Symmetric Response Routing Ability

Enables this feature to request that the SIP server sends the response back to the source IP address and port
from which the request originated.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

100rel Ability
Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the header field of the INVITE message.

Value Range
Disable: This feature is not activated.
Enable (Active): Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature.
Enable (Passive): Activates this feature only when requested by the other device.

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP QoS Ability

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

214 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when "ToS" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when "DSCP" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.

Value Range
0–63

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when "HEX" is selected in SIP QoS Ability.

Value Range
00–FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Timer
SIP T1
Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE requests and responses.

Value Range
5–255 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 215

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

SIP T2
Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses and non-INVITE requests.

Value Range
40–255 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property

216 PC Programming Manual

 9.9 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property

9.9 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-SIPGW—Card Property
Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

DNS SRV Record Resolve Ability

Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS
SRV record.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.9 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property

PC Programming Manual 217

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-SIPGW—Port Property
Programming Port Properties
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.

Icon Description for Parameter Type

Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.

Manual programming is compulsory.
Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Manual programming is optional.

Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters on this screen can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider
for each virtual SIP gateway port. A maximum of 32 SIP providers can be programmed, and a different SIP
provider can be assigned to each virtual SIP gateway port.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to
be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.

Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to programme the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting a
provider.
1. Click a desired tab.
2. Enter information or select from the list for each parameter.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles
Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1. Click Add Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to
add the settings to provider profiles.
3. Click Execute.

218 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Channel Attribute
Specifies the channel property of each port to enable several sessions to be performed for one subscription
with the SIP provider.

Value Range
Basic channel: The subscriber channel that is assigned the SIP registration information.
Additional channel for SlotN (N=1–4) ChN (N=1–16): The subordinative channel that uses the same registration
information as a Basic channel for SIP sessions. Select the Slot number and the Basic channel number to
which the Additional channel belongs.
Not Used: The channel is not in use.

Note
• The Basic channel and Additional channel can belong to different V-SIPGW16 cards.

PC Programming Manual 219

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

• When you save the data on the Main screen, for each virtual SIP gateway port that has Channel
Attribute set to Basic channel, the following items are checked for duplication: SIP Server Location
—Name, SIP Server Location—IP Address, and SIP Service Domain.
A maximum of 32 different SIP providers can be programmed.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Provider Name
Specifies the name of the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

SIP Server Location—Name

Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server.

Note
Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

SIP Server Location—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server. This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server.

Note
Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server, if provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

SIP Server Port Number

Specifies the port number of the SIP proxy server.

220 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

SIP Service Domain

Specifies the domain name provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, , and #)

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Account
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual 221

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

User Name
Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Authentication ID
Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Authentication Password
Specifies the authentication password used for registration with the SIP provider.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

222 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Register
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Register Ability
Specifies whether to send the REGISTER message to the SIP server.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Register Sending Interval

Specifies the maximum length of interval time after which the PBX sends the REGISTER message.

PC Programming Manual 223

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
10–86400 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Un-Register Ability when port INS

Specifies whether to unregister the previous registration and send the REGISTER message to the SIP server
when the port status is set back to INS.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Registrar Server—Name
Specifies the domain name of the SIP registrar server.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Registrar Server—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the SIP registrar server. This setting is compulsory when a register IP address is
provided.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Registrar Server Port Number

Specifies the port number of the SIP registrar server.

Value Range
1–65535

224 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Register Resending Interval (s)

Specifies the interval time for resending the REGISTER message.

Value Range
0-65535 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

NAT
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 225

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

STUN Server—Name
Specifies the domain name of a STUN server.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

STUN Server—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the STUN server. This setting is compulsory when the STUN method is selected
and a DNS server is not used.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

STUN Server Port Number

Specifies the port number of the STUN server.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

226 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Session Refresh (Session Timer)—Session Timer Ability

Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP sessions by sending repeated requests.

Value Range
Disable: This feature is not activated.
Enable (Active): Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature.
Enable (Passive): Activates this feature only when requested by the other device.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Session Refresh (Session Timer)—Session Expire Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to the repeated
requests is received.

Value Range
90–3600 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Session Refresh (Session Timer)—Refresh Method

Specifies the type of request that the PBX sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions.

Value Range
UPDATE, re-INVITE

PC Programming Manual 227

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Session Refresh (Session Timer)—Incoming Refresher Request

Specifies the type of method used for establishing the session interval.

Value Range
UAC, UAS

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

SIP 200 Response Timer (*100 ms)

Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 200 (OK) response when establishing a connection between two
parties. (Specifying "0" will disable the timer.)

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

SIP 18x Response Timer (s)

Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 18x response when establishing a connection between two parties.

Value Range
0–255 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Proxy-Require Option
Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require header field so that the SIP server is notified that the client is behind
a router with NAT enabled and firewall.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

228 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Calling Party
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Header Type
Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored.

Value Range
From Header, P-Preferred-Identity Header

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

From Header—User Part

Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the From header.

PC Programming Manual 229

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

From Header—SIP-URI
Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the From header. The configuration in From Header—User Part
will be invalid if this parameter is set.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part

Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP-URI of the P-Preferred-Identity header.

Value Range
User Name, Authentication ID, PBX-CLIP

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

P-Preferred-Identity Header—SIP-URI
Specifies the complete SIP-URI address of the P-Preferred-Identity header. The configuration in
P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set.

Value Range
Max. 100 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Number Format
Selects the format of the CLIP number to be sent to the called party.

Value Range
International, +International, National

230 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits of the CLIP number to be removed. This setting is compulsory when
PBX-CLIP is selected in From Header—User Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header—User Part.

Value Range
0–32

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the CLIP number in the place of the removed digits. This setting is
compulsory when PBX-CLIP is selected in From Header—User Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header—User
Part.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Anonymous format in "From" header

Specifies the format of the "From" header when not sending caller ID.

Value Range
Display name and SIP-URI, Display name only

Note
If "Display name and SIP-URI" is selected, the display name part and the SIP-URI of the "From" header
will be displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:anonymous@anonymous.invalid>
If "Display name only" is selected, only the display name part of the "From" header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:1234@example.com>

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 231

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Called Party
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Number Format
Specifies the format of an incoming call number.

Value Range
International, +International, National

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Type
Specifies the header of the incoming SIP message in which the dialled number is stored.

232 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
Request-URI, To header

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Voice/FAX
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd

Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd and 3rd priorities.

PC Programming Manual 233

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A, None

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Voice Activity Detection for G.711

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

234 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Inform Annex B Status (G.729A)

Specifies whether to inform that Annex B for the G.729 codec is not supported.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Note
Annex B expansion features for the G.729 codec are not supported by the V-SIPGW16 card. However, it
is necessary to inform some carriers of this fact to avoid having calls disconnected. Carriers can be
informed by enabling this feature.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. This feature enables end-to-end fax signal relay when
the other party prefers a codec other than G.711. This feature functions only if the other party supports G.711.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 235

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

DTMF
Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (SIP INFO)

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for DTMF tones.

Note
Manual programming is required if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

Value Range
96–127

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTP/RTCP
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.

236 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTP QoS Ability

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTP QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTP QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

PC Programming Manual 237

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.

Value Range
00–FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTCP Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether to enable each port to send RTCP packets.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

RTCP Packet Interval

Specifies the interval time until the next RTCP packet is sent.

Value Range
5–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Keep Alive Timer

Specifies the length of time to send Keep Alive packets for the connection. Specifying "0 s" will disable the
sending of Keep Alive packets.

Value Range
0 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s, 50 s, 60 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

238 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T.38
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

PC Programming Manual 239

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Reject T.38 Request from Network

Specifies whether T.38 protocol data requests are rejected or accepted.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

240 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T.38 Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX QoS Available

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

PC Programming Manual 241

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX QoS-DSCP

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
0–63

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

T38 FAX QoS-HEX

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
00–FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

DSP
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

242 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 243

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Supplementary Service
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

244 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

CLIR
Specifies whether to allow restriction of the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when
making a SIP trunk call.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

CNIP (Send)
Specifies whether to send the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when making a
SIP trunk call.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

CNIP (Receive)
Specifies whether to receive the caller’s name to be displayed on the called party’s telephone when receiving
a SIP trunk call.

Value Range
Yes, No

PC Programming Manual 245

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

246 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-IPGW16—Shelf Property
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Main
Gatekeeper Available
Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to
OUS.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTCP Packet Sending Ability

Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTCP Packet Interval

Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received.

Value Range
5–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTP QoS Available

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

PC Programming Manual 247

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTP QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTP QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

RTP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.

Value Range
00–FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX QoS Available

Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX

248 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Priority

Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX QoS-ToS Type

Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX QoS-DSCP

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
0–63

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX QoS-HEX

Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T.38 protocol. This setting is
compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

Value Range
00–FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

PC Programming Manual 249

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

250 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 251

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk.

Value Range
Public, Private, VPN

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Outgoing Call
First-digit Timer (T302-1)
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP
trunk.

Value Range
5–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Inter-digit Timer (T302-2)

Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialled.

Value Range
1–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Dial End Code

Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialled number.

Value Range
0–9, #, *

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Incoming Call
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

252 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Voice Codec Priority 1st

Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G.
711Mu for this parameter.

Value Range
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Voice Codec Priority 2nd

Specifies the second highest priority codec type.

Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Voice Codec Priority 3rd

Specifies the third highest priority codec type.

Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Packet Sampling Time for G.711A

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

PC Programming Manual 253

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Packet Sampling Time for G.711Mu

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Packet Sampling Time for G.729A

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

FAX Detection Ability

Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Programming Manual References

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—Incoming Call— Voice Codec
Priority 1st

FAX Sending Method

Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal.

Value Range
G.711 Inband, T.38

254 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maximum Bit Rate

Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal.

Value Range
No Speed Limit, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600 bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

DTMF
Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out.

Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

Value Range
96–127

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX Max Datagram

Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
272–512

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy

Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

PC Programming Manual 255

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages

Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data

Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
0–3

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T38 FAX Rate Management Method

Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.

Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Timer
T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call.

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

256 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message.

PC Programming Manual 257

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T309
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

258 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T3D3
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

T3D9
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 259

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.11 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property

260 PC Programming Manual

 9.11.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings

9.11.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—

Shelf Property—GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.

Destination Number
Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper.

Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.11.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings

Device Name
Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.11.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Shelf Property—GK Settings

PC Programming Manual 261

9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern

9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property

- Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming
calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX.
A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.

Hunt Pattern 1–16

Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits of dialled numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct
incoming calls.

Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern

Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th

Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority.

Value Range
For 1st:
CDPG1–CDPG48

For 2nd–16th:
None, CDPG1–CDPG48

Maintenance Console Location

9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern

Programming Manual References

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property— Call Distribution Port Group

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

262 PC Programming Manual

 9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-IPGW16—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

Call Distribution Port Group

Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP
gateway port.

Value Range
1–48

PC Programming Manual 263

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

264 PC Programming Manual

 9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-IPEXT32—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.

Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)

Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-PT side (reference only).

Value Range
2427

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

PC Programming Manual 265

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Keep Alive Time-Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are
received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

First Resending Time (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Resending Time Out (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
150–240 s

266 PC Programming Manual

 9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

First Resending Time (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Resending Time Out (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol)
data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
75–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

PC Programming Manual 267

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

268 PC Programming Manual

 9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 269

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-IPEXT32—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
IP-PT Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Preparation
Open 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the
mother board and DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.

270 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 271

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

272 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address)

Specifies the MAC address of the IP-PT.
This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the IP-PT.

Value Range
1–256

PC Programming Manual 273

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

274 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual 275

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.

Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.

Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows:
– When G.722 is selected, the priority is G.722 ® G.711 ® G.729A.
– When G.711 is selected, the priority is G.711 ® G.729A (G.722 is unavailable).
– When G.729A is selected, both G.711 and G.722 are unavailable.
Value Range
G.711, G.729A, G.722

276 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

ANNOUNCE Mode
Specifies if the extension’s built-in announce message is used in place of the PBX’s announce message.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 277

9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

278 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-SIPEXT32—Card Property
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

PC Programming Manual 279

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

280 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-SIPEXT32—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

PC Programming Manual 281

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password
manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy
to button. This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS, and the
programmer must be in On-line mode.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

282 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Bearer
Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set to Speech automatically.

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group.

PC Programming Manual 283

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Value Range
1–256

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

Maintenance Console Location

9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main— P2P Group
11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

284 PC Programming Manual

 9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-IPCS4—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified.

Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS)

Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-CS side.

Value Range
2427 (reference only)

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

PC Programming Manual 285

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Value Range
1024–65024

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Keep Alive Time-Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-CS to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-CS. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-CSs. If no communications are
received from an IP-CS for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-CS to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-CSs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

First Resending Time (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Resending Time Out (PTAP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
150–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

286 PC Programming Manual

 9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

First Resending Time (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Resending Time Out (MGCP)

Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol)
data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

Value Range
75–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

PC Programming Manual 287

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.17 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Card Property

288 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-IPCS4—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port.

IP-CS Registration and De-registration

An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later.
IP-CS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Preparation
Open 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the
mother board and DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-CS.
1. Connect the IP-CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-CS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-CS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.

PC Programming Manual 289

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None".

Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

CS Name
Specifies the CS name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

290 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-CS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-CS (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Air Sync Group No

Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP-CS.

PC Programming Manual 291

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Value Range
None, 1–16

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Programming Manual References

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

CS Name
Specifies the CS name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

292 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.

Value Range
G.711, G.729A

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.711)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Voice Activity Detection for G.711

Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 293

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.18 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS4—Port Property

294 PC Programming Manual

 9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-UTEXT32—Card Property
Various settings can be programmed for the V-UTEXT32 card.

Main
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

PC Programming Manual 295

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

PERIODIC Inform
Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected extensions.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

PERIODIC Inform Interval

Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to "Enable".

Value Range
30–3600 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

NTP Query Interval

Specifies the interval at which connected extensions poll the specified NTP server for a time update.

Value Range
1–24 hours

Maintenance Console Location

9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property

296 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

V-UTEXT32—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for the ports of the V-UTEXT32 card.

KX-UT Series SIP Phone Registration and De-registration

A KX-UT series SIP phone must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and SIP phone before it
can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the SIP phone later.
KX-UT Series SIP Phone Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in
On-line mode.

Preparation
Open 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the
mother board and DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the SIP phone.
1. Connect the SIP phone to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the SIP phone is successfully registered, the status of the SIP phone will update to show
"Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the SIP phone.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the SIP phone is successfully de-registered, the status of the SIP phone will update to show
"None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the SIP phone when normal de-registration has been
unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the SIP phone.

PC Programming Manual 297

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

1. Click Forced De-registration.

A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the SIP phone is successfully de-registered, the status of the SIP phone will update to show
"None".

Main
Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP phone to the PBX. This parameter can only be modified
when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS.

Value Range
4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Status
Indicates whether a certain SIP phone is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address)

Specifies the MAC address of the SIP phone.
This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.

298 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the SIP phone (reference only).

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the SIP phone (reference only).

Value Range
Version number

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

P2P Group
Specifies the peer-to-peer group.

Value Range
1–256

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 299

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group Name

Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s name (reference only).

Value Range
P2P Group Name

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Option
System Speed Dial Download
Specifies if the connected KX-UT series SIP phone will download system speed dial entries from the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Programming Manual References

9.4 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main— System Speed Dial Download For
UT Extensions

SIP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

300 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.

Value Range
0–63

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

UT Codec Priority - 1st—UT Codec Priority - 4th

Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. None is only available for 2nd, 3rd, and 4th priorities.

Value Range
G.722, G711A, G.729A, G711Mu, None

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Packet Sampling Time

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Jitter Buffer - Maximum Delay

Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
3–50 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Jitter Buffer - Minimum Delay

Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

PC Programming Manual 301

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Value Range
1–2 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Jitter Buffer - Initial Delay

Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.

Value Range
1–7 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

Gain Type
Specifies the type of gain file to distribute to connected KX-UT series SIP phones.

Value Range
Default, Type1, Type2, Type3

Maintenance Console Location

9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property

302 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

SLC2 - Card Property
The property for the extension cards can be specified.

KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode (reserved)

Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or
not.

Value Range
Mode 1: Does not switch the control signals
Mode 2: Switches the control signals

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

SLT Pulse Dial Mode

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

SLT Off Hook Time

Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as an
off-hook signal.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

SLT Off Hook Guard Time

Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for
pulse dials.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=12–63) ms

PC Programming Manual 303

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

SLT Flash Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall
button.

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

Feature Guide References

2.13.3 Call Splitting

Flash Timing - Min.

Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms

304 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

Flash Timing - Range

Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.

Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

DTMF-R STD Detection Time

Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone.

Value Range
2 ´ n (n=1–31) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.21 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot— SLC2 - Card Property

PC Programming Manual 305

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

SLC2 - Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Port
Indicates the port or channel number (reference only).

Value Range
Port or channel number

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).

Value Range
SLT: SLT port (SLC)

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).

Value Range
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the SLT port).

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

306 PC Programming Manual

 9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Programming Manual References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Programming Manual References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

PC Programming Manual 307

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.

Outgoing Guard Time

Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
3–6 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

First Dial Timer (CO)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the
telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.

Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

CO Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer

Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from
the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.

Value Range
24 ´ n (n=1–50) ms

308 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer

Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.

Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
Other, 60%, 67%

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

PC Programming Manual 309

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
20 + (4 ´ n) (n=1–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and
make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

310 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
12+ (4 ´ n) (n=1–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Programming Manual References

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling

Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.

Value Range
FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF

PC Programming Manual 311

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Max Receive Time

Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.

Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection

Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.

Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

312 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination

Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—
Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving
a call. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer

Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller
ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
1040 + (80 ´ n) (n=0–37) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 313

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Start Code 1 and Start Code 2

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code
2.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code-PRIVATE, OUT OF AREA,

TECHNICAL REASON, UNKNOWN NUMBER, RESTRICTED NUMBER
Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code.

314 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Header[03]

Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal.

Value Range
DDN, Caller ID

Maintenance Console Location

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 315

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port

Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Busy Out Status

Indicates the Busy Out status (reference only).

Value Range
Normal, Busy Out

316 PC Programming Manual

 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 ´ n (n=1–112) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

PC Programming Manual 317

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
Low, High

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Reverse Detection
Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.

Value Range
Disable: For no trunk call
Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Programming Manual References

9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Paytone Detection
Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company.

318 PC Programming Manual

 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

PC Programming Manual 319

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

320 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified.

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as
a TIE line.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203

Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 321

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

322 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 323

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

324 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

PC Programming Manual 325

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.

326 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.

Value Range
0–6000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

PC Programming Manual 327

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

328 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

PC Programming Manual 329

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port

Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.

Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
4.3.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

330 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

LLC Information
Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is
made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.

Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

PC Programming Manual 331

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

332 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

PC Programming Manual 333

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot
10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension
Inter-digit
10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for
en Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode

Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary
service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.

Value Range
1-link: One TEI is assigned to the BRI CO port.
2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when Access Mode on the Network tab is set
to P-MP.)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.

334 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

PC Programming Manual 335

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". This setting is only
available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension.

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

336 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Extension Progress Tone

Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension. This setting is only available when Port
Type on this screen is set to Extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

Network
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.

PC Programming Manual 337

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

338 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

L1 Mode
Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port.

Value Range
Call, Permanent

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

L2 Mode
Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.

Value Range
Call, Permanent

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Access Mode
Selects the configuration of the BRI port.

Value Range
P-P: Point-to-Point
P-MP: Point-to-multipoint

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

TEI Mode
Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI port.

Value Range
Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63

PC Programming Manual 339

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.

340 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network
Private: Private Network
VPN: Virtual Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

PC Programming Manual 341

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Supplementary Service
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

342 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes

For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

PC Programming Manual 343

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

CCBS Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

344 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

CCBS Type
Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS Delete Digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of
call.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

PC Programming Manual 345

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port

Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

346 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
4.3.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.

Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

CRC4 Mode
Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control
technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to
32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.)

PC Programming Manual 347

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port. This setting is only available
when using the PRI23 card.

Value Range
B8ZS, AMI

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card.

Value Range
Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

348 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual 349

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot
10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension
Inter-digit
10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for
en Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

350 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Programming Manual References

Section 17 PBX Configuration—Private Network

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Loopback Test started by Network

Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Programming Manual References

Network Loopback Test

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

PC Programming Manual 351

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port Type
Selects the type of the port.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

352 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

Network Configuration
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

PC Programming Manual 353

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

354 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network
Private: Private Network
VPN: Virtual Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

PC Programming Manual 355

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

356 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Supplementary Service
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Note
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

PC Programming Manual 357

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen.

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911:
No, Yes

For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

CCBS Type
Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature,
from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

358 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS Delete Digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of
call.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

PC Programming Manual 359

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—

DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed.

Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
3

Maintenance Console Location

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

Port Status
Specifies the port’s status.
This option is only available in On-line mode.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

Maintenance Console Location

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

For Output - Device Type

Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).

Value Range
Ringer, Relay, Door Opener

360 PC Programming Manual

 9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

Maintenance Console Location

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

For Sensor - Input Signal Decision Time

Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the
input and makes a sensor call.

Value Range
32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

For Sensor - Input Signal Detection Reopening Time

Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor
will be ignored.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–255) s

Maintenance Console Location

9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

PC Programming Manual 361

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable

Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 512 PSs can be registered.
Information on 20 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming
instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Installation
Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
PS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
3. Highlight PBX sites and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or
de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".

362 PC Programming Manual

 9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Personal Identification Number

Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong
PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.

Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).

Value Range
1–512

Maintenance Console Location

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT),
and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension
number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

PC Programming Manual 363

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
5.2.2.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

364 PC Programming Manual

 9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

System options can be programmed.

System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).

To clear the System ID

1. Click the Clear Master CS button.
2. A warning will be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning, and then click Yes.
Note
The System ID can be cleared using this procedure only in Off-line mode.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card

Selects the initial status of cards after installation.

Value Range
In Service, Out of Service

Maintenance Console Location

9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card

Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card

Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is
installed for the first time.

Value Range
ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Unified Messaging features are supported. DIL and DID call
distribution are available for the D channel.

PC Programming Manual 365

9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and
Unified Messaging features are not available in this mode.

Maintenance Console Location

9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

366 PC Programming Manual

 9.31 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Clock Priority

9.31 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Clock

Priority
Slot Number
Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an
external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each slot.
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being
connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That
PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other
PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on
the network to synchronise their timing.

Value Range
None, Slot Number

Maintenance Console Location

9.31 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Clock Priority

PC Programming Manual 367

9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP

Resource
IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for
various functions of the PBX.
The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in
order to recommend which DSP card(s) should be used. Click DSP Resource Advisor to access this feature.
(See 9.32.1.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor.)

9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—

Setting
Set the amount of DSP resources to reserve for each PBX function that uses DSP resources.

Option DSP Power

Indicates the total amount of available DSP resources based on the installed DSP card(s) (reference only).
The number of resources provided by each type of DSP card is as follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
Up to 2 DSP cards can be installed on the mother board.
Because the system reserves 2 resources for internal system functions, the total amount of available resources
indicated will be 2 less than the total resources of the installed card(s).

Value Range
Resource amount (3 digits)

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Option DSP #1, Option DSP #2

Indicates the type of the installed DSP card(s) (reference only).

Value Range
DSP S, DSP M, DSP L

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

368 PC Programming Manual

 9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—VoIP (G.711)
Specifies the number of simultaneous VoIP calls to reserve DSP resources for.

Value Range
0–506 VoIP calls

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Unified message
Specifies the number of UM ports (including a fax port) to reserve DSP resources for.

Value Range
0–25 ports (UM: 24 ports, Fax: 1 port)

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Two-way Recording
Specifies the number of UM ports reserved in Services—Unified message to use for Two-way Recording.

Value Range
0–24 ports (cannot exceed the value set in Services—Unified message)

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—OGM
Specifies the number of OGM ports to reserve DSP resources for.

PC Programming Manual 369

9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

Value Range
0–64 ports

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Conference trunk
Specifies the number of conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for.

Value Range
0–24 conference rooms

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Services—Free resources (G.711)

Indicates the amount of free DSP resources available to allocate (reference only).

Value Range
0–506 DSP resources

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Guide References

5.4.4 DSP Resource Usage

Select a time to apply the set values

Specifies when the settings made on this screen are applied.

Note
Any calls being made that use DSP resources will be disconnected when setting values are changed and
applied.

370 PC Programming Manual

 9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

Value Range
• Set: Specify a date and time to apply the changes, and click OK. The changes will be applied at the specified
date and time.
• Apply now: The changes are applied immediately. Click OK to apply the settings immediately.

Maintenance Console Location

9.32 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource

PC Programming Manual 371

9.32.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

9.32.1.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

—DSP Resource Advisor
The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX functions.
1. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on the
DSP cards installed in the PBX.
2. In the Ports column, enter the number of ports to allocate to each PBX function.
3. For voice calls, it is useful to estimate how often each call function is used, as every extension or trunk is
not in use all the time. In the Busy Ratio (%) column, specify the anticipated ratio of time the type of voice
call function will be used.
4. As values are entered, the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for
the input amounts. Likewise, the value for Free resources (G.711) will decrease.

Note
Click Clear to reset the input values and start again.
5. When all items are allocated, confirm that the amount of resources input does not exceed the value
indicated in Total Power.
• Click Apply to insert the specified allocation settings into the DSP Resource—Setting screen.
• Click Cancel to return to the DSP Resource—Setting screen without making any changes.
For details, refer to 5.4.4.2 DSP Resource Advisor in the Feature Guide.

372 PC Programming Manual

 9.32.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

9.32.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—

Usage
The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage
patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings.
• The graph displays DSP resource usage over time. The time frame displayed can be displayed in
increments of 1 hour, 4 hours, or 24 hours. Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored.
• Each site of a One-look network can be viewed.
• The DSP report feature is only accessible from the Master unit.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 373

9.32.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

374 PC Programming Manual

 Section 10
PBX Configuration—System

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 375

10.1.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting

10.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time

10.1.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—Date & Time

Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions
(e.g., PT, PS).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Date & Time

Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and
typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.

Note
When this setting is changed and applied, it may take between 1 minute and several hours (depending on
the configuration of the PBX network) for all connected IP-PTs to reflect this change on their displays.
• At default settings, KX-UT series SIP phones synchronise to the PBX’s date and time once every hour.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting

376 PC Programming Manual

 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP /

Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed.
Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
—Daylight Saving.

Automatic Time Adjustment—Synchronisation mode

Specifies the synchronisation of the time between the Master unit and Slave units of a One-look network. For
the Master unit, only "Disable" can be selected.

Value Range
Disable: Synchronisation is not enabled (for the Master unit and Stand-alone units)
Enable: Synchronsation is enabled (for Slave units)

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

Automatic Time Adjustment—Automatic Time Correction on Stand-alone mode

Enables the PBX to automatically adjust its clock every day according to the time information provided by the
network.

Value Range
Disable, ISDN & Caller ID (FSK), SNTP

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—SNTP Server—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of an SNTP server.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

PC Programming Manual 377

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number

Indicates the port number used for communication with an SNTP server (reference only).

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone

Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows.

Value Range
-14:00–+14:00

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone for PC

Indicates the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone of the PC (reference only).

Value Range
-14:00–+14:00

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

378 PC Programming Manual

 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight

Saving—Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date,
and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer
times can be programmed.

Setting
Enables Summer time.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

Start Date—Year, Month, Day

Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual 379

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

End Date—Year, Month, Day

Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31

Maintenance Console Location

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

380 PC Programming Manual

 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.

PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.5 Operator Features

BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM

Selects the audio source of BGM.

Value Range
External BGM, Internal BGM

Maintenance Console Location

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold

Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.

Value Range
Tone, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8

PC Programming Manual 381

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Maintenance Console Location

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer

Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold,
or ringback tone).

Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone

Maintenance Console Location

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

382 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers &

Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval

Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This
is the length of time that the called party’s extension will ring for each attempt.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual 383

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature
is set.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Dial—Extension First Digit

Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination
must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard.

Value Range
1–250 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder
tone.

Value Range
1–250 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

384 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Dial—Analogue CO First Digit

Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start

Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue
trunk calls.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in
each time mode.
Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night is set to "0".

Value Range
1–240 s

PC Programming Manual 385

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time—
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Recall—Hold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held
call remains unretrieved.

Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Recall—Transfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer
Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.

Value Range
1–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

386 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Recall—Call Park Recall

Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination
assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

Value Range
1–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Recall—Disconnect after Recall

Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the
held call is disconnected.

Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 1–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone

Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status
or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be
disconnected when this timer expires.)

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual 387

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle
status when this timer expires.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode.
The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.

Value Range
0–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

388 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering

Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.

Value Range
0.0–12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer

Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialling before the
call is redirected to the operator.

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA

Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.

PC Programming Manual 389

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Value Range
0–5 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing
destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept

Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being
disconnected.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

390 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter

Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0"
enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.)

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time

Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller
prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.)

Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 0–7) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message

Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.

PC Programming Manual 391

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

DISA—Reorder Tone Duration

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected. If "0" is
specified, no reorder tone is sent and the call is disconnected immediately.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Doorphone—Call Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

392 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone—Call Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone—Open Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.

Value Range
2–7 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter

Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual 393

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder—Interval Time

Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration

Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer

Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.

Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 0–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

394 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer

Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after
the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the
conference.

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer

Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the
conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Miscellaneous
Caller ID—Waiting to receive
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is
received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

PC Programming Manual 395

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display

Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line
from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five
seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.

Value Range
0–250 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.19.1 Caller ID

Extension PIN—Lock Counter

Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked
extension PIN cannot be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables
this counter.)

Value Range
None, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Sensor—Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

396 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID

Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call
will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

Value Range
0–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE

Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line. The call will be
redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

Value Range
3–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode

Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to
idle status.

Value Range
1–15 s

PC Programming Manual 397

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Air Synchronisation—Watching Degeneracy

Specifies the length of time that a Slave CS can maintain an ongoing call after air synchronisation is lost.

Value Range
60 ´ n (n=0–300) s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time

Specifies the length of time from when the voice mail seizes a trunk (for example, to transfer a call) until the
voice mail goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the voice mail will be unable to dial the number
and make a connection.

Value Range
1–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length

Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a
conversation.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS
during a conversation.

398 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

During Conversation—Pause Signal Time

Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer

When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS
before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.

Value Range
0–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

Feature Guide References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

Conference Group Call—Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established
with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is
cancelled.

Value Range
0–120 s

PC Programming Manual 399

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Maintenance Console Location

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call
Operation
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

400 PC Programming Manual

 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day.
The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the
Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time
Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.

1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting

Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,

Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when 1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start,
Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 401

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

5.1.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting

Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute

Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute

Specifies the end time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

402 PC Programming Manual

 10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
You can click the UM Holiday Table link to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging
system.

Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—Start Date—Month

Specifies the month of the holiday start date.

Value Range
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—Start Date—Day

Specifies the day of the holiday start date.

Value Range
1–31

Maintenance Console Location

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

PC Programming Manual 403

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Holiday Table—End Date—Month

Specifies the month of the holiday end date.

Value Range
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—End Date—Day

Specifies the day of the holiday end date.

Value Range
1–31

Maintenance Console Location

10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

404 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

10.6 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs in
a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.4.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

No. of Additional Digits

Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.

Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.

PC Programming Manual 405

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Feature Guide References

5.1.5 Operator Features

Idle Line Access (Local Access)

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle trunk automatically).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Group Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

406 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

TIE Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling

Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial

PC Programming Manual 407

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Personal Speed Dialling - Programming

Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Doorphone Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

408 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

External BGM On / Off

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

OGM Record / Clear / Playback

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain
OGM.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Single CO Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk.

PC Programming Manual 409

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Group Call Pickup

Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Directed Call Pickup

Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup
Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny

410 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a trunk call notified through an external pager.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Group Paging Answer

Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Automatic Callback Busy Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 411

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code

Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature
settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions
— Remote Operation by Other Extension

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions
— Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Account Code Entry

Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

412 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding
extension number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Park / Call Park Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 413

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held
trunk number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

414 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

External Feature Access

Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

ISDN Hold
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of
the PBX feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

COLR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called
party’s number to the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 415

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

CLIR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s
number to the called party.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP,
CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension

Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber’s number)
or the extension to the network.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number

416 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can
be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using
the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting.
Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 417

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

418 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

FWD No Answer Timer Set

Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming
call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 419

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution
group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from
picking up calls to your extension).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

420 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Paging Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging
your extension).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features

Data Line Security Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other
extensions during data transmission).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 421

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call

Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an
extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Automatic Call Waiting

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone, or a
call via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions
from joining your conversation).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy
Override

422 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy

Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off

Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Incoming Call Queue Monitor

Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status
of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 423

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Supervisor Extension Number

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be
automatically dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup
Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Absent Message Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

424 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

BGM Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while
on-hook.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

PC Programming Manual 425

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—
Printing Message 1–8

Feature Guide References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the
forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service Switch
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

426 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Remote Extension Dial Lock Off

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Remote Extension Dial Lock On

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 427

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension PIN Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Dial Information (CTI)

Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference Group Call Operation

Specifies the feature number used to make a conference group call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

428 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring
Duration
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Centralised BLF Monitor Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Busy Out Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 5— Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

PC Programming Manual 429

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations
in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in
this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.

Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Leading Number

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

430 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having
to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered
numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks" in the Feature Guide).
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.4.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.

Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialling number.

Value Range
1–4000: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling
4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.4.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling
4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.4.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

PC Programming Manual 431

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND

Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.4.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C.
Waiting for Extension Call
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C.
Waiting for Extension Call

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.10.4.3 Whisper OHCA

Executive Busy Override

Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy
Override
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny

432 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive

Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice

Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving
method to ring tone or voice.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Guide References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Message Waiting Set

Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor

PC Programming Manual 433

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive

Override Deny
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Automatic Callback Busy

Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes
idle.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Guide References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on
this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful,
for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C.
Waiting for Extension Call
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C.
Waiting for Extension Call

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
2.10.4.3 Whisper OHCA

434 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

10.7 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS

Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum
of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) level for making trunk calls in each time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone— COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code

PC Programming Manual 435

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Level on Extension Lock

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial
Lock feature.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

TRS Level for System Speed Dialling

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers, which overrides
the TRS/Barring set for the current time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial
15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

436 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit

Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG
Settings.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For
Incoming Call
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 437

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Account Code Mode

Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Option, Forced

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

438 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

CF (MSN)
Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead
of the PBX, on an MSN basis.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)

Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Assistant
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 439

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Call Pickup by DSS

Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

440 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

OHCA / Whisper OHCA

Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.10.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
2.10.4.3 Whisper OHCA

Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation

Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.

Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature,
it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall in 10.3 PBX
Configuration—System—Timers & Counters.

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters— Recall—Transfer Recall

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Automatic Answer (Caller)

Enables a caller to have calls automatically answered when the destination has set Hands-free Answerback.

Value Range
Disable: Even if the destination has set Hands-free Answerback, the call will not be automatically answered.
Enable: The call will be automatically answered.

PC Programming Manual 441

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Executive
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Executive Busy Override

Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

442 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Executive Busy Override Deny

Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Manager
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Group Forward Set

Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.

PC Programming Manual 443

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PT Programming Mode
Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.

Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
Enable: A PT user can perform only personal programming.

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.4.3 PT Programming

Manager
Specifies the authorisation to use manager features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

444 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Time Service Switch

Enables manual switching of time modes.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up
or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at
each COS level.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 445

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

SDN Key Mode

Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.

Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner

Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s
registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

SDN Key Assignment by PT Program

Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

446 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Optional Device & Other Extensions

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Enables access to external relays.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

PC Programming Manual 447

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Accept the Call from DISA

Enables reception of calls from DISA.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Remote Operation by Other Extension

Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using
DISA).

Value Range
Allow, Deny

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS

Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS

Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.

Value Range
Allow, Deny

448 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

CA
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

CA Chat
Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA ICD Group Log Out

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

CA ICD Group Log Out

Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.

PC Programming Manual 449

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA Chat

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Miscellaneous
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Conference Group Call Operation

Enables making conference group calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring
Duration
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call
Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

450 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Accept a collect call (for Brazil)

Enables accepting collect calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

PC Programming Manual 451

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External Call Block

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External

Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/
lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

Outgoing Trunk Group 1–96

Specifies the available trunk groups.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External Call Block

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

452 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal

Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call
distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom
calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–
64
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

Maintenance Console Location

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Programming Manual References

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone— COS

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

PC Programming Manual 453

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO

10.8 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone

Patterns

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call

from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls
are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can
be selected for use by an extension.

Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option1, Option2

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— Trunk Group Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

454 PC Programming Manual

 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone

10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call

from Doorphone
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern
table can be selected for use by an extension.

Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 455

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call

from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Guide.

Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2

456 PC Programming Manual

 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

PC Programming Manual 457

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1
PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.

Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here applies
when setting the Timed Reminder feature.

Value Range
12H, 24H

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

PT LCD—Password / PIN Display

Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays
of extensions while being entered.

Value Range
Hide, Display

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.

458 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle

Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button
customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.)

Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode
for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from
extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)

PC Programming Manual 459

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension

Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.

Value Range
Do Not Page, Page

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND
11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with IP-PTs.

Value Range
Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard
through the hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through
both the hands-free speaker and the handset.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

460 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key

Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.

Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed

Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.

Value Range
Normal, High Speed

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting

Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot
prevent incoming calls from ringing.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after

Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is
established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.

Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings

PC Programming Manual 461

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key

Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed
while having a conversation.

Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

PT Operation—Hold Key Mode

Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.

Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Option 2
Extension Clear—Call Waiting
Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

462 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)

Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the codec type for PSs.

Value Range
A-Law, Mu-Law

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PC Programming Manual 463

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

CODEC—Network CODEC
Selects the codec type for ISDN lines.

Value Range
A-Law, Mu-Law

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode

Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line; if used as the end
code, "#" will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— ISDN Outgoing Call
Type
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— ISDN Outgoing Call
Type

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within
a preprogrammed time period.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

464 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory

Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension
within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Redial—Call Log by Redial key

Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a display PT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call

Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing
and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned
on a trunk group basis.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line
Call Duration Limit
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Extension-CO Duration Time
(*60s)

PC Programming Manual 465

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference

Selects whether to allow a call between 2 outside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference
has left the conference.

Value Range
Enable: The call will be disconnected.
Disable: The call will continue.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference
4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Option 3
Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in voice-calling mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

466 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback
2.17.1 Paging
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from
DOORPHONE
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for
example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when
answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a
new party joins a conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PC Programming Manual 467

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a
party leaves a conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds
a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

468 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension

Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.

Value Range
Type A, Type B

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS
feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling.

Value Range
Type A, Type B

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.25.1 Dial Tone

Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of echo cancelling for conference calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

PC Programming Manual 469

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of echo cancelling for trunk-to-trunk calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line

Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-analogue trunk calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line

Enables the use of echo cancelling for extension-to-ISDN line calls.
If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is used for extension-to-ISDN line calls.
If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is not used for extension-to-ISDN line calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Option 4
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.

Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
2.21.3 LED Indication

470 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable
this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or Flash".

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution
group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to "ON or
Flash".

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call

Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current
call or places the call on consultation hold.

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

PC Programming Manual 471

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call

Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the
Hands-free Answerback feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller

ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call
from a public network.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering

Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network to have the same leading number. For example,
extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2. Only the Extension Number
Method is supported.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Leading Number

472 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)

Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the
transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that
performed the transfer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual
PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group

Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling extension or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or
virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a call.

Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling extension is sent.

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PC Programming Manual 473

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
4.3.6 Network ICD Group

System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a
preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer

Feature Guide References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD

Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS
with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Option 5
SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" in
the Feature Guide.

474 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern

Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.

Value Range
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Whisper OHCA—for SLT

Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.3 Whisper OHCA

Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call

Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy
extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 475

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing
that trunk from being used.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN

Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone
company.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

PT Feature Access—No. 1–8

Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.

Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On,
External BGM, Paging

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN

Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks
that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.

476 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23

Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Sending Format

Specifies the sending format of the calling party name when making a call to the ISDN network.

Value Range
Display, Facility

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Option 6 (CTI)
Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call
Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA).

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

PC Programming Manual 477

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as
Communication Assistant (CA). When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times
without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call
Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive
check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical
connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

478 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party
Call Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When
the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Make Call—SLT Ring

Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key

Selects whether to force an extension to become idle while having a call held on a PDN/SDN button.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual 479

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Option 7
P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
Specifies the order of priority of the codecs to use for P2P groups.

Value Range
Priority Voice 1: G.729, G.711, G.722
Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3: G.729, G.711, G.722, None

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

P2P Group—Video Conference

Specifies the availability of video conferencing for capable extensions within P2P groups.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

480 PC Programming Manual

 10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID

Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.

Extension Caller ID Modulation Type

Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Channel Seizure Signal Bits

Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Mark Signal Bits

Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 481

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Channel Seizure Wait Time

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring
when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
64 ´ n (n=5–35) ms

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Caller ID Signal Type

Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference
only).

Value Range
FSK

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID

Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending
the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

482 PC Programming Manual

 10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Name to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID
information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

FSK Transmission Level

Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation.

Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB

PC Programming Manual 483

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Maintenance Console Location

10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

484 PC Programming Manual

 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

10.11 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.

Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)

Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1.

Value Range
-15.5–15.5 dB

Maintenance Console Location

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker

Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.

Value Range
-15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB

Maintenance Console Location

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

External MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)

Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1.

Value Range
-31.5–31.5 dB

PC Programming Manual 485

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Maintenance Console Location

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Internal MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music on Hold 1–8)

Specifies the music volume for each internal BGM (MOH 1–8).

Value Range
-31.5–31.5 dB

Maintenance Console Location

10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

486 PC Programming Manual

 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Card

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Card

Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.

Up Gain (To PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.

Value Range
-31.5–31.5 dB

Maintenance Console Location

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Card

Down Gain (From PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.

Value Range
-15.5–15.5 dB

Maintenance Console Location

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Card

PC Programming Manual 487

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Card

488 PC Programming Manual

 Section 11
PBX Configuration—Group

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 489

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

11.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the group.
A maximum of 96 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group" in the Feature Guide.

Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line
Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of
"7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS
Settings.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

490 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Line Hunting Order

Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start
from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks.

Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)

Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.

Value Range
None, 60 ´ n (n = 1–60) s

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)

Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.

Value Range
None, 60 ´ n (n = 1–60) s

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

PC Programming Manual 491

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings
10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Caller ID Modification Table

Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).

Value Range
1–4

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Dialling Plan Table

Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling.

Value Range
1–4

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

492 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

DISA Tone Detection—Silence

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone Detection—Continuous

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

PC Programming Manual 493

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Host PBX Access Code

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Host PBX Access Code 1–10

Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

494 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Collect Call Reject (For Brazil)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode

Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time

Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting
is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
500 ms, 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Flashing Time

Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in
Brazil.

Value Range
1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

PC Programming Manual 495

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access

Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.

Trunk Group No. & Name

Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.

Value Range
Trunk Group No. 1–96

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Programming Manual References

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

496 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID

Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.

Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can be
shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4
Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can
be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long Distance
Code settings to the modified number.

Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)

Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller’s number.

Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller’s number.

Value Range
0–9

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

PC Programming Manual 497

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings— Caller ID Modification Table
14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is applied
to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown
or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National), the
caller’s number is not modified.

Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International)

Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as an international
call. The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National).

Value Range
1–31

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private

498 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National)

Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national
call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).

Value Range
0–30

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number (for International)

Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 499

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Added Number (for National)

Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for
International).

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party number—Type of
Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is
International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification
Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to
the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network
numbering plan.

Value Range
0–9

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private

500 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each
type of network numbering plan.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party Number—Type of
Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 501

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can
recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number
and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller’s
voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the PBX mutes
the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the analogue
trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme
from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0–9, *, and #])

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue CO
First Digit
10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue CO
Inter-digit
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Dialling Plan Table

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the number dialled by en-bloc dialling.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

502 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 503

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign

It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.

Select Auto Assigning Table

Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is
selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan
table.

Value Range
Type A:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type B:
• 1: N11
• 2: NNX XXXX
• 3: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type C:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NNX XXXX
• 4: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 5–50: Not stored
Type D:
• 1–47: Not stored
• 48: N11
• 49: NXX XXXX
• 50: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign

Programming Manual References

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

504 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group.

Trunk Group Name

Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Rate
Specifies the call charge rate.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—
Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 505

11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User Group

11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can
belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and
several paging groups. A maximum of 32 tenants can be programmed.

User Group Name

Specifies the name of the extension user group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User Group

Programming Manual References

11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User Group

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

506 PC Programming Manual

 11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group

11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group

Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 96 call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be
assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more
than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
None, 01–96

Maintenance Console Location

11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 507

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group—All

Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.

Call Pickup Group Name

Specifies the name of the call pickup group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

User Group 1–96

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

Maintenance Console Location

11.3.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group

508 PC Programming Manual

 11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can
also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups. A maximum of 96 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging
groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned
to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
None, 01–96

Maintenance Console Location

11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 509

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—All Setting

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—All Setting

Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user
group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

Specifies the name of the paging group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

User Group 1–96

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF (white)

Maintenance Console Location

11.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

510 PC Programming Manual

 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—External Pager

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—External

Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—External Pager

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

External Pager 1–16

Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

Maintenance Console Location

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—External Pager

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 511

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

11.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution

Group—Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call
distribution groups can be programmed.
To set the Call Forwarding (FWD) settings of ICD groups easily, click Group FWD. To assign extensions to
ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY"
in the Feature Guide.

Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

512 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Call Waiting Distribution

Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
All, Distribution

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

PC Programming Manual 513

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and
the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant— Music On Hold

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions
are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed
to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External Call Block
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

514 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

CLIP on ICD Group Button

Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Overflow Queuing Busy

Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

PC Programming Manual 515

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity

Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.

Value Range
None, 1–30

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual
Queue Redirection in each time mode.

516 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time

Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.

Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–125) s

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the
Hurry-up button.

Value Range
None, 1–30

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 517

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table

Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.

Value Range
None, Table 1–Table 128

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing

Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call
arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.

518 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Miscellaneous
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Extension No Answer Redirection Time

Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member
extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.

Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

PC Programming Manual 519

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out

Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out
from the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
None, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Maximum No. of Busy Extension

Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32: Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned
number.

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Last Extension Log-out

Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

VIP Call Mode

Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.

520 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.5 VIP Call

Supervisor Extension Number

Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor
and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need
not belong to the group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Group Log / Group FWD

Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

PC Programming Manual 521

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call
log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Group FWD Call from CO—Setting

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from CO—Destination

Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

522 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination

Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 523

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution

Group—Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of
multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD
groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "5.2.2.6 Virtual PS" in the Feature
Guide). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an
ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, and PS
extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

524 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the
incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)

Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept
another call.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–300) s

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up
Timer based on
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

PC Programming Manual 525

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution

Group—Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled.
A maximum of 128 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16

Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.

Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence.
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer.
Disconnect: Disconnects the line.
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence.
Wait 5 ´ n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time; if not
preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM.

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

526 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution

Group—Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.

Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call

Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in
addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—ICD Group Key Mode

Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode.
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal
programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension
user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.

Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
Delayed Ring

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—Longest Idle Distribution

Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension
that has been idle the longest (ACD).

Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)

PC Programming Manual 527

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is
selected, Wrap-up Timer on 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension
Settings and 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings become
unavailable.

Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.

Maintenance Console Location

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
Wrap-up Timer
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

528 PC Programming Manual

 11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension

Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If
there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can
be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 128 hunting groups can be
programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).

Hunting Group Name

Specifies the name of the hunting group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.

Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension

Maintenance Console Location

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
5.1.2 Group

Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

PC Programming Manual 529

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

Maintenance Console Location

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

530 PC Programming Manual

 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group—

Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting
Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above
(reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual 531

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings

11.7 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings

The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating
extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc. When
a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice message
or dial a number to reach the desired party.

Call Waiting on VM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the UM group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent
to any UM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Intercept to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the Unified Messaging system when
a call is redirected to the UM group by Intercept Routing. When the Unified Messaging system receives the
mailbox number, the Unified Messaging system answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

532 PC Programming Manual

 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the Unified Messaging
system in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the Unified Messaging system, and the
call is not answered within a programmed time period; (2) when the Unified Messaging system is assigned as
the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the Unified Messaging system receives the
mailbox number, the Unified Messaging system answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

PC Programming Manual 533

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls
and incoming calls. In a One-look network, each PBX has its own UM group, and each group has its own
floating extension number.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Extension No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the UM group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the UM group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Site name
Indicates the Site Name of the PBX that UM group belongs to (reference only).

Value Range
Site Name

534 PC Programming Manual

 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

PC Programming Manual 535

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—

Member List
Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group.

No.
Indicates the UM port number (reference only).

Value Range
1–24

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the UM port (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

UM Group No.
Indicates the UM group number and name (reference only).

Value Range
UM Group number and name

Maintenance Console Location

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List

536 PC Programming Manual

 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Programming Manual References

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

PC Programming Manual 537

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension
number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be
programmed, each containing up to 512 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 PS Ring Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring
group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 PS Ring Group

Incoming Trunk Call Information Display

Specifies the information of the incoming trunk call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to the
PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognised, the telephone number will be
shown.

Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number

Maintenance Console Location

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

538 PC Programming Manual

 11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual 539

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Each PS Ring Group can have up to 512 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click
OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits

Maintenance Console Location

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 PS Ring Group

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 PS Ring Group

540 PC Programming Manual

 11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference
group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members
can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups. To assign members to a group, click Member List.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.

Conference Group Name

Specifies the name of the conference group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Broadcast Mode
Specifies whether only the original caller can speak or up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference
group call.

Value Range
Disable: The original caller and up to 7 participants can speak at the start of a conference group call.
Enable: Only the original caller can speak at the start of a conference group call.

Maintenance Console Location

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PS Operation to Talk
Enables PS users to use the push-to-talk feature during a conference group call, when Broadcast Mode
is set to "Enable". The push-to-talk feature allows PS users to speak during the call by pressing any of their
dial keys.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

PC Programming Manual 541

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

Programming Manual References

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group— Broadcast Mode

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

542 PC Programming Manual

 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group—Member List

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group—Member

List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the
Conference Group No. list.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).

Dial Number
Specifies the destination number of each member of the conference group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Dial Number above
(reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 543

11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed.

P2P Group Name

Specifies the name of the P2P group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Bandwidth Control
Specifies whether to use the bandwidth precedence setting of the P2P group for calling among different P2P
groups.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

544 PC Programming Manual

 Section 12
PBX Configuration—Extension

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu
of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 545

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

12.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired

Extension

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—

Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For
each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and
click Find Next.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND,
personal speed dialling, and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate.

Main
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

546 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).

Value Range
SLT: SLT port (SLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT)
SIP: Standard SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT)
SIP-MLT: KX-UT series SIP phone Extension port (V-UTEXT)
UM: Unified Messaging System Extension port

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).

Value Range
UNKNOWN: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the SLT port).
ISDN-Extension: ISDN telephone is connected.

PC Programming Manual 547

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

No Connection: No telephone is connected.

IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the V-IPEXT card is connected.
SIP: SIP Extension is connected.
UT: KX-UT series SIP phone is connected.
VM: Voice Mail Extension
FAX: Fax Extension

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

Value Range
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.

548 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,

Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.

PC Programming Manual 549

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

550 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No
Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 551

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a trunk call.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.

Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration
—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
Port.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number
12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

552 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display
when answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

UM
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Two-way Recording
Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the extension using the Unified Messaging
system.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual 553

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Option 1
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Wireless XDP
Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.

554 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for
accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

PC Programming Manual 555

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
2.10.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an
incoming call distribution group.

556 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup
Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.

PC Programming Manual 557

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

Option 3
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Call Pickup Deny

Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

558 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Executive Override Deny

Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for
each extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension
cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—
Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

PC Programming Manual 559

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Intercom Call by Voice

Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always
ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.

Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Option 4
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

560 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

PC Programming Manual 561

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension
user answers a call that was being monitored.

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

LCS Answer Mode

Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.

Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Option 5
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

562 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.

Value Range
Language1–Language5

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Incoming Call Display

Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display.

Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Key Pad Tone

Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling.

PC Programming Manual 563

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Automatic Answer for CO Call

Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without
going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective
when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Option 6
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

564 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Forced Automatic Answer

Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without
going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch
Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number
when customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring
tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.

Value Range
IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Display Lock
Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see the
Incoming Call Log information at the extension).

Value Range
Unlock, Lock

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 565

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Option 7
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Character Input Mode

Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.

Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode

566 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s
Outgoing Call Log memory.

Value Range
1–100

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

PC Programming Manual 567

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the extension’s telephone type as follows:
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Option 8
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

568 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Caller ID Sending

Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID

Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the
previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue
is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require
a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call
when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX
Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
0–3000 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
Wrap-up Timer
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up
Timer based on

PC Programming Manual 569

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Option 9
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PDN Delayed Ringing

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Built-in Communication Assistant

Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.

Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

570 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Port Number— Built-in Communication
Assistant Server

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Mobile Extension
Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside
destination) for the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired
Extension—FWD/DND.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 571

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Mode for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

572 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Time

Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Keep ring after FWD NA to CO

Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination
via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 573

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

574 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension

Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
Wired extension number

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location Entry—Number to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of wired extensions.

Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.

PC Programming Manual 575

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Value Range
0–5

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

576 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual 577

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/

DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed
for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.

Forward / DND—For external calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for external calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Forward / DND—For internal calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for internal calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
If For both external calls and internal calls is checked, this setting becomes unavailable, and the value set
for external calls is applied to internal calls.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

578 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed

Dial
Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling
numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each
extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
The available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the desired set from the Personal Speed
Dialling No. list.

Speed Dialling Name

Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory
shown on the extension’s display.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Dialling Number
Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

PC Programming Manual 579

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—

Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible
buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.
To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Once flexible buttons have been programmed, the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label sheets,
which can be attached to extension telephones for quick reference. For details, see 1.2.2.1 Editing and
Printing Terminal Labels in Off-line Mode.

Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN, DN

Notice
For each KX-UT series SIP phone that is connected to the PBX, at least one DN button must be assigned
to the extension. Without a DN button assigned, the extension will not be able to make or receive calls.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
1–600

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

580 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out
from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

PC Programming Manual 581

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.

Value Range
1–7

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

582 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Number (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk
calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 583

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Extension Number (for Call Log)

Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log
information.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

584 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the extension’s mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 585

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for SDN)

Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

586 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialling buttons for
extensions.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17.4 PBX Configuration—Private
Network—NDSS Key Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 587

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Label Name
Specifies the name of each flexible button on the KX-NT366 IP-PT. The name specified here is displayed on
the LCD for each button. A maximum of 48 flexible buttons can be customised for this extension.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.21.5 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.

Value Range
IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
00–99

588 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Key Setting & Key Label Name

The Key Label Name function allows you to export a key label template for flexible buttons, according to the
telephone you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–84 screen and edit
the button’s settings.

Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting— Type

Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 589

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Extension Number (for DSS)
→ Extension Number (for ICD Group)
→ Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
→ Extension Number (for Call Log)
→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for SDN)

Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Dial (for One-touch)
→ Dial (for ISDN Service)
→ Dial (for NDSS)

Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)

590 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting— Ext No. of
Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Colour of Font
Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.

Value Range
Any colour

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 591

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Colour of Background
Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a
colour.

Value Range
Any colour

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.

Value Range
4–15

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Telephone Type
Telephone Type
Selects the type of telephone for which you want to export a key label template.

Value Range
NT265 / NT321
NT343 / NT346
NT343 / NT346 with 60CO
UT133 / UT136
Other

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

592 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible

Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be
selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

Programming Manual References

12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 593

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—PF

Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A
maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.

Type
Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.

Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Dial
Specifies the number to be dialled.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.5 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

594 PC Programming Manual

 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send

12.1.6 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS

Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

12.1.6 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 595

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

12.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable

Station

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—

Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 512 PSs can be
programmed.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND
and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User
Group for more details.

Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Property
Indicates the property (reference only).

596 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Value Range
Portable Station

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

Value Range
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.

CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 597

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

598 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,

Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy

Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 599

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No
Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

600 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a trunk call.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.

Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration
—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI
Port.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number

PC Programming Manual 601

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP— CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when
answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

UM
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

602 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Two-way Recording
Specifies whether to enable the two-way recording feature for the PS using the Unified Messaging system.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Option 1
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 603

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for
accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

604 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 605

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an
incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup
Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

606 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Call Pickup Deny

Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

PC Programming Manual 607

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Executive Override Deny

Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for
each PS.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be
used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—
Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

608 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 609

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers
a call that was being monitored.

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

610 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Option 5
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.

Value Range
Language1–Language5

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 611

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Incoming Call Display

Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.

Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

612 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling
buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when
customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Option 7
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

PC Programming Manual 613

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Character Input Mode

Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.

Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

614 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log
memory.

Value Range
1–100

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the type of the PS.

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

PC Programming Manual 615

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when
logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 11.5.3 PBX
Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
0–3000 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
Wrap-up Timer
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up
Timer based on

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

616 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Option 9
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

PDN Delayed Ringing

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Built-in Communication Assistant

Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.

Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable

PC Programming Manual 617

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Port Number— Built-in Communication
Assistant Server

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Mobile Extension
Specifies whether to enable or disable mobile extension features (with a cellular phone or other outside
destination) for the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY

FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings
can be programmed separately for each PS in 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—
FWD/DND.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension No.

618 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Extension Name

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 619

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

FWD Mode for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Time

Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

620 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Keep ring after FWD NA to CO

Specifies whether a PS continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD
N/A or FWD Busy N/A.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 621

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension

Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
PS extension number

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location Entry—Number to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of PS extensions.

Value Range
1–total number of connected PS extensions

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.

622 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Value Range
0–4

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 623

12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

624 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/

DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for
incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.

Forward / DND—For external calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for external calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Forward / DND—For internal calls

Specifies the FWD/DND setting for internal calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
If For both external calls and internal calls is checked, this setting becomes unavailable, and the value set
for external calls is applied to internal calls.

Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 625

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible

Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible
buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time
Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual,
Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
1–600

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
1–96

626 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 627

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.

Value Range
1–7

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on
10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options is set to "Enable".

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing
with LCD

628 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Number (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk
calls are forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 629

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

630 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the PS’s mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 631

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Extension Number (for SDN)

Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

632 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17.4 PBX Configuration—Private
Network—NDSS Key Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
00–99

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 633

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Key Setting & Key Label Name

Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting— Type

Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Extension Number (for DSS)
→ Extension Number (for ICD Group)
→ Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

634 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for SDN)

Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Dial (for One-touch)
→ Dial (for ISDN Service)
→ Dial (for NDSS)

Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)

Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 635

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting— Ext No. of
Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

636 PC Programming Manual

 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible

Button—Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To
select all PSs at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.3.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

Programming Manual References

12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 637

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—NDSS

Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

12.2.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

Programming Manual References

17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

638 PC Programming Manual

 Section 13
PBX Configuration—Optional Device

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Optional Device menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 639

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—

Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).

Slot
Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Port
Indicates the port number to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Name
Specifies the doorphone name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

640 PC Programming Manual

 13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night).

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call
5.1.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are
able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

PC Programming Manual 641

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

VM Trunk Group
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group (connected to a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series PBX using QSIG networking).
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

642 PC Programming Manual

 13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager

13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External

Pager
Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View).

Page Number 1—Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Page Number 1—Name

Specifies the name of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 643

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

13.3 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice

Message

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—

DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide.

Option 1
DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX. In Trunk or All Security mode, the
caller is required to override security by Walking COS or Verification Code Entry in order to enable the restricted
feature temporarily.

Value Range
None: Intercom calls, TIE line calls, and trunk calls can be made.
Trunk: Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made. TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk
calls are restricted.
All: All calls are restricted.

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

DISA Security—Remote Walking COS through DISA without PIN (Activation Key
Required)
Enables registered caller ID numbers to be automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through
DISA, and to use the Walking COS features without entering a PIN.

Value Range
Disable, Enable (Get DISA)

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND

Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting.

644 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Value Range
Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy

Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use.

Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone)

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers

Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu.

Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone)

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO

Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA
is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" on this screen
should be set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using
DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with
DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO

PC Programming Manual 645

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network

Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA
is established.
To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be
set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call
using DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with
DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO

Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA.

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect
the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with
DISA—DISA to Public CO

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network

Enables trunk-to-private trunk calls to be established using DISA.

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect
the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

646 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with
DISA—DISA to Private Network

CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required)

Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the
PBX by dialling "#" + extension number.

Value Range
Disable: "#" is ignored if dialled.
Enable (as "Flash"): The current trunk call will be placed on hold, then transferred to the extension whose
number is entered.

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"

Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback, reorder, or
busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Option 2
Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the prerecorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time mode.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

PC Programming Manual 647

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—

DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.5 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Name
Specifies the name of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9

Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM, the
caller can be directed to the destination by dialling a 1-digit DISA AA number.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

648 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Busy / DND Message No.

Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Programming Manual References

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Fax Extension
Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

PC Programming Manual 649

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External

Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
Before programming these settings, For Output - Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the
DOORPHONE card’s property settings. (® 9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE
Card—Card Property)

External Relay No.

Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only).

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

650 PC Programming Manual

 13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Name
Specifies the relay name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

Relay Activate Time

Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated.

Value Range
1–7 s

Maintenance Console Location

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

COS Number
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to
activate relays.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions
— External Relay Access

PC Programming Manual 651

13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.4 External Relay Control

652 PC Programming Manual

 13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External

Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).

External Sensor No.

Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only).

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

PC Programming Manual 653

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Name
Specifies the sensor name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the destination number of sensor calls for each port in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Tenant No.
Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant
number corresponds to the Time Table number.)

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

654 PC Programming Manual

 Section 14
PBX Configuration—Feature

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 655

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed

Dial
The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be
automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The
System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
A maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature numbers) can be
programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of
numbers, click the applicable tab.

Memory
Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed
Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 14.6 PBX
Configuration—Feature—Tenant.

Value Range
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expansion for Tenant 1–32: additional tables

Maintenance Console Location

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant— System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Name
Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID

656 PC Programming Manual

 14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the
System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID

CLI Destination
Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are
routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number
above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL
—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 657

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main
Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
2.23.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Room Status Control

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

658 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder

SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8

Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the
message is selected from an extension. This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing
Message.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.22.2 Printing Message

Bill
Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest
Activates call billing features for the PBX.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

PC Programming Manual 659

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"

Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar"

Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"

Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill.

660 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Minibar"

Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)

Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature.

Value Range
Language 1–Language 5

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

PC Programming Manual 661

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Header 1–3

Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3

Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge
Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

662 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest telephone charges.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point

Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use.

Value Range
0–6

PC Programming Manual 663

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Currency
Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 3 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Currency Display Position

Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge.

Value Range
Head, Tail

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

664 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit

Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a
conversation.

Value Range
Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard.
Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is
detected.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 665

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification

Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use
to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Verification Code
Specifies the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

User Name
Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

Verification Code PIN

Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a trunk call with the verification code.

CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

666 PC Programming Manual

 14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

COS Number
Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Itemised Billing Code for ARS

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code
for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 667

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Budget Management
Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—
Digits After Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

668 PC Programming Manual

 14.4 PBX Configuration—Feature—Second Dial Tone

14.4 PBX Configuration—Feature—Second Dial

Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a
preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Second Dial Tone Waiting Code

Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

14.4 PBX Configuration—Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

Pause Repeating Counter

Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone.

Value Range
0–20

Maintenance Console Location

14.4 PBX Configuration—Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PC Programming Manual 669

14.5 PBX Configuration—Feature—Absent Message

14.5 PBX Configuration—Feature—Absent Message

When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can
select one of them.

Absent Message
Specifies the message for display.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

14.5 PBX Configuration—Feature—Absent Message

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

670 PC Programming Manual

 14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

A maximum of 32 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups.
The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).

Music On Hold
Specifies the audio source to be used for Music on Hold.

Value Range
Same as System Setting, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8, Tone

Maintenance Console Location

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Operator (Extension Number)

Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the tenant operator. When this parameter is left unspecified, the PBX operator serves as the
tenant operator.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Programming Manual References

10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.5 Operator Features

ARS Mode
Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call.

PC Programming Manual 671

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access
method.
Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System
Setting is applied.

Maintenance Console Location

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Programming Manual References

16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
5.1.3 Tenant Service

System Speed Dial

Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant.

Value Range
Same as System Setting: PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used.
Tenant Exclusive: Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are used.

Maintenance Console Location

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Programming Manual References

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
5.1.3 Tenant Service

Time Service Mode

Specifies which PBX’s clock in a One-look network is used as reference for the tenant’s Time Service functions
and for ICD Group functions.

Value Range
Normal: Use the clock of the PBX to which the device or trunk for a service (e.g., incoming call features) is
connected.

672 PC Programming Manual

 14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

1–16: Use the clock of the PBX in the One-look network with the selected Site ID.

Maintenance Console Location

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

PC Programming Manual 673

14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant

674 PC Programming Manual

 Section 15
PBX Configuration—TRS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 675

15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code

15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time
mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes here
and excepted codes in 15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code. If the leading digits of the dialled
number are not found in the applicable Denied Code tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

676 PC Programming Manual

 15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code

15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time
mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes in
15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code and excepted codes here. A call denied by the applicable
Denied Code tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code tables, and if a match is found, the call
is made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction/call barring for each level.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual 677

15.3 PBX Configuration—TRS—Special Carrier

15.3 PBX Configuration—TRS—Special Carrier

If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time
a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone
number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the
following digits.
A maximum of 100 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed.

Special Carrier Access Code

Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should
be unique.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

15.3 PBX Configuration—TRS—Special Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

678 PC Programming Manual

 15.4 PBX Configuration—TRS—Emergency Dial

15.4 PBX Configuration—TRS—Emergency Dial

Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—
Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

Emergency Number
Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls. It is not necessary to start the emergency number
with a Trunk Access number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

15.4 PBX Configuration—TRS—Emergency Dial

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

PC Programming Manual 679

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The
following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or
switch between TRS/Barring methods.

TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Check for Dial " * # "

Enables a TRS/Barring check for the user-dialled " " and "#". This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls
which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges.

Value Range
No Check, Check

Maintenance Console Location

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check

Selects whether a trunk is disconnected if the TRS/Barring check has not been completed when the trunk
Inter-digit timer expires.

Value Range
Disconnect: The trunk is disconnected as soon as the timer expires.
Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires.

680 PC Programming Manual

 15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Maintenance Console Location

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a
trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–7

Maintenance Console Location

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

TRS Check after EFA

Enables TRS/Barring to check the digits dialled after External Feature Access (EFA) during a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)

Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by
the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

Value Range
Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6: The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels
below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.

PC Programming Manual 681

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes,
which are only applied to that level.

Maintenance Console Location

15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

682 PC Programming Manual

 Section 16
PBX Configuration—ARS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 683

16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting

16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made,
according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to
connect it to the appropriate carrier.

ARS Mode
Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access,
Trunk Access, or S-CO Line Access method.

Maintenance Console Location

16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial

Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 16.2 PBX Configuration
—ARS—Leading Number.

Value Range
Disconnect: the line will be disconnected.
Local Access: the dialled number will be handled by Idle Line Access method.

Maintenance Console Location

16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

684 PC Programming Manual

 16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature.
A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a
Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled number.
The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding the leading
number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Additional Number of Digits

Specifies the additional (remaining) number of digits following each leading number.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Routing Plan Number

Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

PC Programming Manual 685

16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

686 PC Programming Manual

 16.3 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time

16.3 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time

The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired
Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

PC Programming Manual 687

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time

Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the
selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.

Time-A–D—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Time-A–D—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block.

Note
Time-A must be the earliest block in the day, and the following blocks must be set in chronological order.

Correct programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 17:00
Time-C: 21:00

Incorrect programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 13:00
Time-C: 11:30
Time-D: 17:00

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

688 PC Programming Manual

 16.4 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Priority

16.4 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan

Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day
of the week by clicking the applicable tab.

Time-A–Time-D
Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone.

Value Range
None, 1–48

Maintenance Console Location

16.4 PBX Configuration—ARS—Routing Plan Priority

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 689

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 48 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.

Carrier Name
Specifies the carrier name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user-dialled number.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Modify Command
Specifies the commands to modify the user-dialled number to access the carrier. For details of each command,
see the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H)

Maintenance Console Location

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

690 PC Programming Manual

 16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Carrier Access Code

Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number by
specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

TRG 01–TRG 96
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.

TRG 01–TRG 96
Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use
with that carrier.

Value Range
OFF (white), ON (blue)

Maintenance Console Location

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Authorisation Code for Tenant

Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-dialled
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.

Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32

Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

PC Programming Manual 691

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
5.1.3 Tenant Service

692 PC Programming Manual

 16.6 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number Exception

16.6 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number

Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number
includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if
ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 20 leading number exception
entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.

Leading Number Exception

Specifies the leading number exception.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

16.6 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number Exception

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 693

16.7 PBX Configuration—ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

16.7 PBX Configuration—ARS—Authorisation Code

for TRG
An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be
added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen
16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.

TRG—TRG 01–TRG 96
Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

16.7 PBX Configuration—ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

Programming Manual References

16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier—Carrier— Modify Command

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

694 PC Programming Manual

 Section 17
PBX Configuration—Private Network

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Private Network menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 695

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE

Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be
used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one voice mail system (centralised VM) connected to another
PBX. This can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.

Own PBX Code

Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network. If
this cell is left empty, the Extension Number Method is used.

Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Priority 1–Priority 8
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of others in the TIE line
network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

696 PC Programming Manual

 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Trunk Group
Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority.

Value Range
None, 1–96

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Enhanced QSIG
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line
network.

PC Programming Manual 697

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)

Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is
attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

698 PC Programming Manual

 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network

Data Transmission
Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications
over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network
DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised VM feature, and a
voice mail system can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID

Specifies the Network ID of the PBX, for Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). This parameter must be
set in correspondence with the Network IDs assigned to other PBXs in the network.
Network IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX each within a network. Assigning the same Network ID to
two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
Changing this value in On-line mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data.

Value Range
0: The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs.
1: The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs.
2–8: The PBX transmits BLF data over the network.

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission VoIP->ISDN
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from a VoIP port through any ISDN ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data
Transfer
9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data
Transfer

PC Programming Manual 699

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission ISDN->VoIP
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)— IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF
data to Network Operator

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission Counter
Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data
is discarded.

Value Range
1–63

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Broadcasting Interval Timer
Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically
according to the interval specified here.

Value Range
100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms

700 PC Programming Manual

 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data

Re-transmission : Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before
being cancelled.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key
Required)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data

Re-transmission : Repeat Timer
Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications.

Value Range
10–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key
Required)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 701

17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network

Operator (VoIP)
This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX
that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this
screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.

Network Operator Extension No.

Specifies the number of an extension at the monitor PBX (the PBX whose Network Data Transmission
for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private
Network—Network Data Transmission). Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

Programming Manual References

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Site
Specifies the PBX in the One-look network where the V-IPGW16 card is installed for sending extension status
data.

Value Range
Site name in the One-look network

Maintenance Console Location

17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Specifies the slot number of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when
using VoIP to transmit data.

Value Range
Undefined, 2, 31–46

702 PC Programming Manual

 17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

Maintenance Console Location

17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)

Programming Manual References

9.1 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 703

17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS

Key Table
Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can
be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an
extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button. The NDSS Clear button can be used only in On-line
mode.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network Data Transmission for Centralised
Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network
Data Transmission screen.

Network Extension No.

Specifies the number of the remote extension (attached to another PBX) that will be monitored. The number
input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

4.1 Public Network Features—4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Extension Name for Programming Reference

Specifies the name of the network extension. This name is only shown here, not on the displays of extensions.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored

Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX
that the extension is connected to (reference only).

Value Range
None, 1–8

704 PC Programming Manual

 17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Maintenance Console Location

17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 705

17.5 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit

17.5 PBX Configuration—Private Network—

Centralised UM/VM Unit
View and programme settings for using the Unified Messaging system and VPSs in a private network. To view
a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the UM system or VM unit, as assigned by the PBX (refence only).

Value Range
Unit No.

Maintenance Console Location

17.5 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit

Floating Extension No. (TIE)

Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised UM or VM (VPS) group. This floating extension
number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

17.5 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit

Group Name (20 characters)

Specifies the name of the centralised UM or VM (VPS) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions
that call it.

Value Range
Max. 20 Characters

Maintenance Console Location

17.5 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Centralised UM/VM Unit

706 PC Programming Manual

 Section 18
PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 707

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO

Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 256 trunk groups.

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position to which each trunk card belongs (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Card Type
Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

708 PC Programming Manual

 18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

CO Name
Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call from the trunk.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Trunk Group Number

Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs.
When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is automatically set to "7" for the corresponding trunks.

Value Range
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 709

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL

Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as
the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL distribution
is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). If
desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks.
Tenant number and service group number can also be programmed for each trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

710 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 711

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

712 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
3.2.1 System Features—3.2.1.40 Service Group

VM Trunk Group
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group (connected to a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series PBX using QSIG networking).
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found
in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 713

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

714 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen
is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

PC Programming Manual 715

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

716 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution
or for TIE line service.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI/
DID distribution or for TIE line service.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 717

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI /

DID Table
Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number
has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is
found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution can be enabled
or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or to
programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.

DDI / DID Number

Specifies the DDI/DID number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Name

Specifies the name for the DDI/DID number which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call
with the DDI/DID number. The name of the DDI/DID number can be printed out on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—DDI/DID Number & Name

718 PC Programming Manual

 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

PC Programming Manual 719

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Value Range
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

VM Trunk Group
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group (connected to a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series PBX using QSIG networking).
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

720 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—

Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Generate DDI/DID Number (From)

Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed. DDI/DID numbers for subsequent locations
will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number of Registration
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

PC Programming Manual 721

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If
the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all
check box. If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked, the destination numbers for
subsequent locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location for
that time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

722 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—

Name Generate
Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

No. of Digits to Delete

Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DDI/DID number when using it as part of the
DDI/DID name.

Value Range
0–32

PC Programming Manual 723

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Name Prefix
Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Name Suffix
Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI/DID name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

724 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN

Table
Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be
distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port must be set to P-MP.

MSN
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).

Site
Indicates the site number of the PBX in the One-look network (reference only).

Value Range
1– 16

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Slot
Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

PC Programming Manual 725

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Port
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

MSN Number
Specifies the MSN.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

MSN Name
Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call with the MSN.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

MSN Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the MSN destination in each time mode.

726 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

UM Service Group No.

Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination
is the floating extension number of a UM group.
The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting
message to the caller.

Value Range
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

PC Programming Manual 727

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

VM Trunk Group
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group (connected to a KX-NCP/KX-TDE series PBX using QSIG networking).
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls
will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification number
is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.

Site
Indicates the site number of the PBX in the One-look network (reference only).

Value Range
1– 16

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

728 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Slot
Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Port
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Programming Manual References

9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

PC Programming Manual 729

18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—

Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.

Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)

Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.

Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT card will ring at the
original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination

Maintenance Console Location

18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not

programmed.)
Enables the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call.

Value Range
Disable (Reorder Tone): Sends a reorder tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT card will ring
at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to an operator

Maintenance Console Location

18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call

Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

730 PC Programming Manual

 18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Maintenance Console Location

18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

PC Programming Manual 731

18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

732 PC Programming Manual

 Section 19
PBX Configuration—Maintenance

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 733

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.

SMDR Format—Type
Selects the format of SMDR output.

Value Range
Type A: 80 digits without call charge information
Type B: 80 digits with call charge information
Type C: 120 digits

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Port
Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data.

Value Range
None, LAN(TELNET), RS-232C

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size being used
in the printer.

Value Range
No Print, 4–99

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

734 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation
should be shorter than the page length.

Value Range
0–95

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Date Format

Selects the printed date format.

Value Range
MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H)

Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.

Value Range
12H, 24H

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC Programming Manual 735

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Print Information—Outgoing Call

Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming
determines the printable records.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call
Printout (SMDR)

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Incoming Call

Specifies whether the information relating to incoming trunk calls, such as caller’s identification name and
number, is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Intercom Call

Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

736 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Hotel Room Status

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control

Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge

PC Programming Manual 737

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Print Information—Error Log

Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
5.5.4 Local Alarm Information

SMDR Options
Option—ARS Dial
Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature.

Value Range
Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number
Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
2.8 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Caller ID Number & Name

Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

738 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—DDI/DID Number & Name

Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number.

Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Secret Dial
Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled number.
Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in Option—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialled
numbers as dots regardless of this setting.

Value Range
Print "...." (Secret), Print Dialled Number

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.6.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Privacy Mode
Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled, and how many digits to hide when enabled.
To enable this setting, Print Information—Outgoing Call on the SMDR tab should be set to Print.

Value Range
Print Dialled Number: Disables private dialling; all dialled numbers are shown on SMDR.
No Print: No dialled number will be shown on SMDR.
Print "X", Print "XX", Print "XXX", Print "XXXX": The selected number of digits at the end of dialled telephone
numbers, and any additional digits dialled after connection, are shown on SMDR as "X".

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

PC Programming Manual 739

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Condition Code "RC"

Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Condition Code "AN"

Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Option—Caller ID Modification
Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX)
or after being modified.

Value Range
Before Modification, After Modification

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

740 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

LAN—SMDR Port Number

Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN.

Value Range
1–65535

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

LAN—SMDR Password
Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the LAN.

Value Range
Max. 10 characters

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

LAN—New Line Code for Telnet

Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator.
If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).

Value Range
CR + LF, CR

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

PC Programming Manual 741

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

RS-232C
Communication—Baud Rate
Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer.
To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set Communication
—Flow on this screen to Hardware.

Value Range
2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—RS-232C— Communication—Flow

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—Parity Bit
Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing
a character.
Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.

Value Range
None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—Flow
Enables the hardware flow control.

Value Range
None, Hardware

742 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Communication—NL Code
Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer.
If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).

Value Range
CR + LF, CR

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—Word Length
Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character.
When connecting the Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS-232C cable, assign the following values
to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX:
Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None, Stop Bit: 1 bit

Notice
Do not use the following combinations:
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 1 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Mark, Stop Bit: 2 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit
Value Range
7 bit, 8 bit

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—Stop Bit
Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character.
Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.

Value Range
1 bit, 2 bit

PC Programming Manual 743

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation

Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface
(RS-232C) port of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Maintenance
Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX
detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display
will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Set

Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 Local Alarm Information

744 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Daily Test Start Time—Hour

Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time.

Value Range
0–23

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.

Value Range
0–59

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 Local Alarm Information

Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after
re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for
Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private
Network—Network Data Transmission.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key
Required)
17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data
Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter

PC Programming Manual 745

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being
re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Programming Manual References

17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key
Required)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.

Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main

Feature Guide References

5.1.6 Manager Features

746 PC Programming Manual

 19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air

Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups.
Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-16) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor, click CS Status
Monitor.
Air Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.
Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.

Index
Indicates the CS number (reference only).

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Slot Type
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).

Value Range
1 (Physical), Virtual

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

PC Programming Manual 747

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Site
Indicates the site name of the PBX in the One-look network (reference only).

Value Range
Site name

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

CS Name
Indicates the name of the CS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Connection
Indicates the port status. To change the status of the port, click the desired cell in the column, and then select
INS or OUS for the port.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

748 PC Programming Manual

 19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Status
Indicates whether a certain CS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
-, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

CS Class
Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen
is set to OUS.

Value Range
Sync Master CS1, Sync Master CS2, Sync Slave CS

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Primary CS—Index
Specifies the number of the primary CS.

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Primary CS—Slot
Indicates the slot position of the primary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

PC Programming Manual 749

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Primary CS—Port
Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Primary CS—CS Name

Indicates the name of the primary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Secondary CS—Index
Specifies the number of the secondary CS.

Value Range
1–16

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Secondary CS—Slot
Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Secondary CS—Port
Indicates the port number of the secondary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

750 PC Programming Manual

 19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

Secondary CS—CS Name

Indicates the name of the secondary CS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

PC Programming Manual 751

19.2 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Air Synchronisation

752 PC Programming Manual

 Section 20
UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 753

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

A maximum of 1022 subscriber mailboxes can be created. Although the System Manager can use a telephone
to create or edit mailboxes, the System Administrator can create several mailboxes at once using Web
Maintenance Console. Each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
Click each tab on the Mailbox Settings screen to specify the desired parameters.

Adding Mailboxes
1. Click the icon.
2. Edit each parameter in the "Mailbox" dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
A range of mailboxes can be added that use the default mailbox settings.
1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the range of mailboxes to add in From and To. Check Use the same number for Mailbox and
Extension to assign each mailbox to the same number extension.
3. Enter the number of mailboxes to create in Number Of Mailboxes:. To edit the default settings to be used
for each new mailbox, click Edit Default Mailboxes and make changes as necessary.
4. When all settings have been made, click OK to create the range of mailboxes.
Editing Mailboxes
To edit a specific mailbox, select the desired mailbox, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click OK.

Mailbox Parameters
Mailbox Number
Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox
numbers is set in 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Mailbox— Mailbox No.
Max. Length (3-8), or when you initialise the system.

Note
The mailbox number can only be set when adding a mailbox; when editing a mailbox, you cannot change
the assigned mailbox number.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.20 Mailbox

754 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Extension
Specifies the extension number of the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid extension number including an Extension
Group number can be assigned.

Note
If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox, all group members are able to access the
messages stored in the mailbox.

Value Range
2–8 digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.20 Mailbox

First Name
Specifies the first name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the
first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Last Name
Specifies the last name of the subscriber. If there are non-alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the
first name, the mailbox is not included in the directory.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual 755

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Mailbox Password
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. If a default password is programmed by an
administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes. Administrators can
change and delete the password.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. On the Mailbox Parameters Screen, click Edit under Mailbox Password for the mailbox extension to
change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.3 Password Administration

Mailbox Password (Message client)

Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software programme. If a default
password is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned automatically when creating all
mailboxes. Administrators can change and delete the password.

Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification
(KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. On the Mailbox Parameters Screen, click Edit under Mailbox Password (Message client) for the mailbox
extension to change.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Value Range
4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9)

756 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.3 Password Administration

Class of Service (Mailbox)

Determines the set of services available to the subscriber.

Note
• We recommend that parameters for each COS number be defined before assigning a Class of Service
(COS) to each mailbox or creating new mailboxes.
• COS No. 63 and 64 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager,
respectively. No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 63 and 64.

Value Range
COS No. 1–62

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.11 Class of Service (COS)

Covering Extension
Forwards calls to a second extension when the first extension’s subscriber is not available to take the call. The
Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling options that can be enabled or disabled by the
subscriber. The caller can also be transferred the Covering Extension by pressing [0] while a Personal Greeting
is being played, or while leaving a message.

Note
Extension Groups or Logical Extensions (extensions whose calls are set to always be directed their
mailboxes) cannot be assigned as covering extensions.

Value Range
1–8 digits

PC Programming Manual 757

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Interview Mailbox
Assigns an interview mailbox to the subscriber’s mailbox. In order for it to function properly, the interview
mailbox number must not be the same number as an existing mailbox and an existing mailbox group.

Note
Each caller’s replies to an interview session are saved as one message.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.25 Interview Service

All Calls Transfer to Mailbox

If this parameter is set to "Yes", the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls
directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension
mailbox. The extension does not ring when a call is received.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Transfer Sequence (Selection/Others)

Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Allows each mailbox to be assigned its own Call
Transfer Sequence (Personal Transfer Sequence).

Note
• When "System" is selected, the Unified Messaging system uses the extension transfer sequence
preprogrammed in 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—PBX

758 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Parameters— PBX Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R

F T X , ;]).
• This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in
24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Alternate
Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).

Value Range
System, Others
If "Others" is specified, enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—PBX Parameters— PBX Environment—
Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status

No Answer Time (Selection/Others)

Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before handling unanswered calls to the
extension.

Note
When "System" is selected, the Unified Messaging system uses the time preprogrammed in 24.1.1 UM
Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters— Call Transfer No
Answer Time (10-60 s).

Value Range
System, Others (If "Others" is selected, specify 10–60 s)

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters— Call Transfer No
Answer Time (10-60 s)

PC Programming Manual 759

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Call Transfer Status

Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches the subscriber’s extension. Click
Edit for the extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.

Note
This setting can be changed by subscribers.

Value Range
None: Rings the subscriber’s extension.
Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the
subscriber’s extension. The subscriber’s extension will not ring.
Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name. The Unified Messaging system then calls
the subscriber and plays back the caller name. The subscriber can choose whether to answer the call.
Intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to Mailbox: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.
Transfer to specified telephone number 1–5: Transfers the caller to one of the specified telephone numbers
in numerical order of priority.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status

Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer

Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is no answer. Click Edit for the
extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.

Note
• This setting can be changed by subscribers.
• More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service

760 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy. Click Edit for the
extension to change, programme the settings, and click OK to finish.

Note
• This setting can be changed by subscribers.
• More than one option can be selected.

Value Range
Leave a message: Allows the caller to record a message.
Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering extension.
Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages the subscriber by intercom.
Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension.
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Call Transfer Anytime in Incomplete Handling Menu

Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call while the Automated Attendant
service is playing an Incomplete Call Handling menu.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters

Notification Parameters
The Unified Messaging system is able to notify a subscriber when a new message is recorded in his or her
mailbox. There are 3 methods the system can use for notification:
– Lighting the Message Waiting Lamp on the subscriber’s extension telephone.
– Calling a preprogrammed device (external telephone, etc.). A maximum of 3 devices (Device 1, 2, 3) can
be programmed per mailbox.
– Sending an e-mail to a designated address.

Message Waiting Lamp

If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new message is
recorded.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 761

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

Telephone Device
Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device. The following parameters can be
specified for devices 1, 2, and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for
Unreceived Message to "Yes", and programme the settings, then click OK to finish.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type

Specifies the type of message for which notification is sent. Notification can be sent for all messages, or voice
messages or fax messages only.

Value Range
All Messages, Voice Messages, Fax Messages

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

762 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]

Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. The subscriber can also specify the number to be dialled by
entering it from his or her telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this feature on a case by case basis.

Note
When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone
number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause)

Value Range
Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
T: Dial Tone Detection
X: Callback Number Entry Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries

Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send notification if the device is busy
or if there is no answer.

Value Range
0–9 times

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)

Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when
the called device is busy.

Value Range
0–120 min

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

PC Programming Manual 763

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)

Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when
the called device does not answer.

Value Range
1–120 min

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode

Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification. The subscriber can also specify the use
mode from his or her telephone.
Schedule: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify the time frame:
1. Select a day from the Day drop-down list (Sunday – Saturday).
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click OK.
Value Range
Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent
Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120

min)
Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received before sending message waiting
notification.

Value Range
0–120 min

764 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between

Device 1, 2, 3 and Next Device
Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending
notification to the next device.

Value Range
0–120 min

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name

Specifies the name of the user of the device.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address

Specifies the e-mail address of the device.

Note
This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail Notification
(KX-NSU2xx) for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software
programme.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

PC Programming Manual 765

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type

Specifies the type of Message Waiting Notification to be sent. Notification can be sent for all messages, or
voice messages or fax messages only.

Value Range
All Messages, Voice Messages, Fax Messages

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order

Specifies the format of the title of the notification.

Value Range
Title-ID-Name, Title-Name-ID, ID-Title-Name, Name-Title-ID, ID-Name-Title, Name-ID-Title

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

766 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String

Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification.

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number

Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (0–9, , #)

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]

Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the Message Waiting Notification.

Value Range
0–120 min

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File

Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e-mail.

PC Programming Manual 767

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Fax File

Specifies whether to attach a fax image file of fax messages to the notification e-mail.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode

Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification.
If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At (HH:MM)" fields.
4. To specify if sent voice message or fax image files are deleted from the Unified Message system after they
are sent by e-mail, select "Yes" for Delete After Send (Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax File).
5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click OK.
Value Range
Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox. If Only Urgent
Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

768 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal Custom
Service settings.

External Message Delivery Active

If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

External Message Delivery Prompt Mode

When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by the system in the specified language.
If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to "Selective", the receiver has a choice of prompts.
See related explanation in 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—
Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt.

Note
If set to "Selective" and the receiver uses a rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified by 22.1 UM
Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break
Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers.

Value Range
Primary, Selective, Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

PC Programming Manual References

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break
Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Auto Forwarding Active

If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for
a specified length of time to another mailbox.

PC Programming Manual 769

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number

Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded.

Note
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Delay Time

Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before forwarding unplayed messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.

Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted
before being forwarded.

Value Range
00:00–99:59

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

770 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Auto Forwarding Message Type

Specifies whether all messages, or only voice messages or only fax messages are forwarded.

Value Range
All Messages, Voice Messages, Fax Messages

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent

Specifies whether only urgent messages are forwarded.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Mode

Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the
messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded
to the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.

Value Range
Copy, Move

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Mode - Message Remains New

Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new. This setting is available only when Auto
Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy".

PC Programming Manual 771

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Auto Forwarding Expires Date and Time

Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will expire.

Value Range
Date and time

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Personal Custom Service

Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The System Administrator can assign an operation to each key.

Note
• These settings can be changed by subscribers.
• Make sure to add a trunk access number when you store an outside telephone number.
• When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the telephone
number (1112223333 in the example here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Pause)
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
1. Click Edit.
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation.
3. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value
4. Click OK when finished.
Assigned Operation
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number.
Enter the PBX trunk access number, such as 9.

772 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

• Page the party: Pages the subscriber.

• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.

Value Range
1-200

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

Outside Numbers
Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the "Transfer to outside (specified number)"
operation in the Custom Service settings. Click OK when finished.

Value Range
Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, and special codes
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

No DTMF Input Operation

Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial anything) after the Personal Greeting.

Value Range
Recording: The caller will be guided to leave a message.
Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, at any time during the day.
Disconnect (Only After Hours): The line will be disconnected only after hours.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 773

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in No DTMF Input Operation is
performed.

Value Range
0–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

Personal Distribution List

Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation. A
maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.

List 1 Name–List 4 Name

Specifies a list name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Personal Distribution List

Feature Guide References

1.8.4 Sending Messages— Personal Group Distribution Lists

List 1 Members–List 4 Members

Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Follow the steps below to edit list members.
1. Click Edit for a List Members item.
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox
numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add, referring to the mailbox numbers
and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.

774 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Value Range
Max. 40 mailboxes per list

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Personal Distribution List

Feature Guide References

1.8.4 Sending Messages— Personal Group Distribution Lists

Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

This tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding, Automatic Login, and Direct Service
settings.

Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2

Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are forwarded when the subscriber sets
Remote Call Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers can be specified per mailbox. Telephone numbers can contain
the digits "0–9" and " ". These telephone numbers should begin with a trunk access number.

Note
Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9 and " ")

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

PC Programming Manual References

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service— Call Transfer to Outside

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.29 Remote Call Forwarding Set

Auto Login Extension

When this item is set to "Enable", subscribers are able to access their mailbox directly without entering the
mailbox number. Subscribers can automatically log in from their extensions, by calling from an outside
telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a
specified DID number or trunk. When logging in from outside telephones, the Toll Saver feature is also
available.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 775

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement

Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature.

Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to that extension.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2

Specifies the telephone number from which the subscriber can automatically be logged in from. When Caller
ID information is received that matches one of these numbers, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged
in to the mailbox. Note that this telephone number must be unique for each mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement

Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the Caller ID of the number
set in Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.

Value Range
Yes, No

776 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to that extension using
the number assigned to Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login DDI/DID

Specifies the DDI/DID number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives this DDI/
DID number from the PBX, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this
number must be unique for each mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login TRG No.

Specifies the trunk number for Automatic Login. When the Unified Messaging system receives a call on this
trunk, the caller (subscriber) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that this number must be unique
for each mailbox.

Value Range
1–96

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement

Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the trunk group number
or the DID number.

Value Range
Yes, No

PC Programming Manual 777

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorised third-parties are not allowed access to any extensions using
the specified trunk group number.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Auto Login Toll Saver

Allows subscribers to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not new messages have been
recorded in their mailboxes by the number of rings they hear before the Unified Messaging system answers
their calls. Toll Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login; subscribers can use Toll
Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number, or by dialling a
telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk.

Value Range
Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature.
DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the preprogrammed DID number from the PBX.
Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that matches one of the preprogrammed
numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
Trunk: Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the preprogrammed trunk.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

Direct Service UM Extension

Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified Messaging extension number. This
setting can only be specified for Unified Messaging extension numbers.

Note
Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this feature.

Value Range
Record No Answer Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when there is no answer.
Record Busy Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when their extension is busy.
Record After Hours Greeting: The subscriber can record the greeting played when the system is in night
mode.
Record Temporary Greeting: The subscriber can record a greeting that is used exclusively until the subscriber
disables it.
Change Day Main Menu: The subscriber can change the Day Main Menu greeting. Only the Message
Manager may make this change.

778 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Change Night Main Menu: The subscriber can change the Night Main Menu greeting. Only the Message
Manager may make this change.
Change Emergency Greeting: The subscriber can change the Emergency Greeting. Only the Message
Manager may make this change.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

PC Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property
20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service— Auto Login
Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 Direct Service Access

Fax Options
Automatic Delivery Status
Specifies whether Automatic Delivery is used to automatically forward received faxes to a specified fax
machine.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ]

Specifies the default number for which to send automatically delivered faxes.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
T: Dial Tone Detection
X: Callback Number Entry Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

PC Programming Manual 779

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message

Specifies if automatically forwarded faxes are marked as "old" or "new", or deleted.

Value Range
Delete Automatically, Save as Old, Save as New

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Play Voice/Fax Selection Menu

Specifies if the subscriber will be prompted to choose which messages will be played: either voice messages,
information about waiting fax messages, or all messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Fax Number Confirmation

Specifies if a dialled fax number must be re-entered for confirmation before sending.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

No Space for Receiving Coverage Mode

Specifies the action taken when there is not enough free space in the mailbox to save a fax message in the
mailbox.

780 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Value Range
Transfer to Fax Extension: Transfers the fax to a specified fax extension.
Receive in GDM: The fax is redirected to the general delivery mailbox.
No Receiving: The fax message is not received and the system goes on hook.

Note
If no fax extension is specified but Transfer to Fax Extension is selected, the system will go on hook.

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management

Cover Page Language

Specifies the language used for the set information generated for fax cover pages.

Value Range
English (US), English (UK), French, CA French, German, Swedish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Spanish,
Norwegian, Danish, Polish, Hungarian, Czech, Russian, Greek

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Fax Cover Page

Announce Number of Messages

Subscriber Service - All New Messages
Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Subscriber Service - All Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.

PC Programming Manual 781

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Subscriber Service - New Voice Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Subscriber Service - New Fax Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new fax messages in their mailbox when
the subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages marked as urgent in their
mailbox when the subscriber logs in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Receiving Message Service - All New Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

782 PC Programming Manual

 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Receiving Message Service - All Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Receiving Message Service - New Voice Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Receiving Message Service - New Fax Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new fax messages in their mailbox when
the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages

Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new urgent messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

PC Programming Manual 783

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Message Client Display Language

Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client.

Value Range
English, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Spanish

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording
When this setting is enabled for the Message Manager mailbox, the following features are enabled for the
Message Manager to access greeting and recording management menus quickly.
• Custom Service Menu messages for Custom Service 1 and 2 can be recorded and changed from the Top
Menu.
• Company Greeting No. 1 can be recorded and changed from the Top Menu. This is useful for recording
the Emergency Greeting.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Quick Menu and Greeting Recording

PC Programming Manual References

23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.17 Emergency Greeting

784 PC Programming Manual

 Section 21
UM Configuration—Class of Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 785

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to its
subscriber. There are 64 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as needed.
COS No. 63 and 64 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System Manager, respectively.
No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 63 and 64.

General
Class Of Service Name
Specifies the Class of Service’s name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 System Manager Features— Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters

Prompt Mode
Specifies the language used for system prompts played for the subscriber during Subscriber Service. If set to
"Primary", the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used.

Value Range
Primary, Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 System Manager Features— Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters

Directory Listing
If set to "Yes", the subscriber’s name and extension number will be listed in the directory (Dialling by Name).

Value Range
No, Yes

786 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Tutorial
The tutorial is a series of voice prompts for setting up the mailbox that is played to subscribers when they first
log in to their mailbox. This item specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service hear a normal tutorial, a
simplified tutorial, or no tutorial when they first log in to their mailbox.
In the tutorial, subscribers are asked to provide:
– A password
– The mailbox owner’s name
– Personal Greetings (No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After Hours Greeting)
Value Range
Normal: A navigation voice menu is given for each step.
Simplified: Only direct prompts are given for making each setting. For Personal Greetings, only a No Answer
Greeting can be set.
None: No tutorial is played and settings for the mailbox must be made manually.

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.31 Subscriber Tutorial

Call-through Service
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can make outside calls by accessing the subscriber service
menu (from an outside telephone) and dialling an outside destination.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call-through Service

E-mail Option
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can receive notifications by e-mail when they have a new
message waiting.

PC Programming Manual 787

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Fax Option
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can use the fax functions of the Unified Messaging system,
such as sending and receiving faxes.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Desktop Messaging
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can access the contents of their mailboxes with an e-mail
application using IMAP. This includes the Microsoft Outlook® e-mail client plug-in.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

3.3.1 Integration with Microsoft Outlook

System Manager Authority

Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a System
Manager.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

788 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Message Manager Authority

Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a Message
Manager.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Mailbox
Personal Greeting Length (s)
Defines the maximum length (in seconds) of Personal Greetings for subscribers in the Class of Service.

Value Range
1–360 s

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings

Message Length (Selection)

Specifies if the length of messages left for subscribers in the Class of Service are unlimited in duration or have
a specified time limit. If set to "Unlimited", the maximum recording time is 60 minutes, and the maximum
recording time for two-way conversations (Two-way Record and Two-way Transfer) is unlimited.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 789

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Message Length (Limited) (min)

Specifies the maximum recording time for messages left to subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified
if Message Length (Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (Selection)

Specifies if a maximum limit is applied to the total amount of messages (new and saved) for mailboxes of
subscribers in the Class of Service.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time (Limited) (min)

Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing messages (both new and saved) for mailboxes of
subscribers in the Class of Service. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time
(Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–600 min

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

New Message Retention Time (Selection)

Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service.
If "Unlimited" is selected, new messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

790 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

New Message Retention Time (Limited) (days)

Defines the number of days that new messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of Service.
The storage period begins the day after the message reception. Only specified if New Message Retention
Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–30 days

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Saved Message Retention Time (Selection)

Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to saved messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
Service. If "Unlimited" is selected, saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber.

Value Range
Unlimited, Limited

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Saved Message Retention Time (Limited) (days)

Defines the number of days that saved messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of
Service. Only specified if Saved Message Retention Time (Selection) is set to "Limited".

Value Range
1–30 days

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Message Retrieval Order

Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Service (played back
for listening).

Value Range
LIFO: Messages are retrieved starting with the most recent (Last In First Out).
FIFO: Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest (First In First Out).

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 791

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Selection)

Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can assign telephone numbers for the Personal Caller Name
Announcement feature.

Value Range
None, Others

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement (Other)

Specifies the maximum number of telephone numbers that subscribers in the Class of Service can assign for
the Personal Caller Name Announcement feature. Only specified if Number of CIDs for Caller Name
Announcement (Selection) is set to "Others".

Value Range
1–30

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Message Envelope Setting

Specifies when message envelopes (message date and time, name of the person who recorded or transferred
the message, telephone number of the caller) are announced.

Value Range
Before: The system announces the message envelope before playing the recorded message.
After: The system announces the message envelope after playing the recorded message.
Require: The system announces the message envelope when the user presses the appropriate dial key as
prompted when listening to the message.

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Mailbox Capacity Warning (Selection)

Specifies if the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording time
for their mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time. If set to "None", the warning will not
be announced.

Value Range
None, Others

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

792 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Mailbox Capacity Warning (Other) (min)

Specifies when the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording
time for mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time. The setting indicates the remaining
recording time capacity threshold for when the announcement is heard. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity
Warning (Selection) is set to "Others".

Value Range
1–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

If set to "Yes", directions for recording a message are given to the caller immediately after the personal greeting
of the subscriber in the Class of Service has been played.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Service answers a call
via Live Call Screening while the caller is leaving a message.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.19 Live Call Screening (LCS)

Delete Message Confirmation

If set to "Yes", the system requests confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before erasing a
message in the mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased immediately.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 793

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Personal Greeting for Caller ID

If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can record personal greetings that are played for specific
callers only (Personal Greeting for Caller ID).

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings

Caller ID Callback
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can call the caller back while listening to the caller’s message
(Caller ID Callback).

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.10 Caller ID Callback

Auto Receipt
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can request to receive confirmation when their message has
been listened to by the message recipient.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

Autoplay New Message

If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages automatically when subscribers in the Class of Service log into
their mailboxes.

794 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Play New Messages Sequentially

If set to "Yes", the system plays all new messages for subscribers in the Class of Service sequentially without
system prompts. The subscriber’s Service Top Menu will be heard after all of the messages are played. This
feature is only available when Autoplay New Message is set to "Yes".

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

First Playback Urgent Message

If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent messages before regular messages for subscribers in the Class of
Service.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.35 Urgent Message

Announce Message Transferred Information

If set to "Yes", the system plays the information of transferred messages to subscribers in the Class of Service
before playing the messages.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 795

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Caller ID Number Announcement

Specifies whether or not the system announces the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the Class of Service
plays a message left by a caller, if their name has not been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement
feature. If the name has been recorded, it will be announced regardless of this setting.

Note
If "Caller ID Callback" is set to "Yes", Caller ID numbers will be announced regardless of this setting (see
21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Caller ID Callback).

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Announce Option Menu after Erasing Message

If set to "Yes", the system plays the option menu after erasing a message for subscribers in the Class of Service.
If set to "No", the system plays the next message automatically without playing the option menu.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

New Message Length Announcement

If set to "Yes", the system announces the total length of new messages when the number of new messages
is announced for subscribers in the Class of Service.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Password Expiry Period (Selection)

Specifies if the mailbox passwords for subscribers in the Class of Service will expire after a set time.

Value Range
Disable, Others

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

796 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.3 Password Administration

Password Expiry Period (Other)

Specifies the number of days a set mailbox password will be used before it expires and the system prompts
the subscriber for a new password. This feature is only available when Password Expiry Period
(Selection) is set to "Others".

Value Range
5–200 days

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.3 Password Administration

Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

Specifies whether two-way recording sessions are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service
as "old" or "new" messages.

Value Range
Save as Old, Save as New

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Call Transfer
Intercom Paging Group
Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to subscribers in the Class of Service.

Value Range
1–33

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

PC Programming Manual 797

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Use Call Waiting on Busy

If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in the Class of Service when they are on a call and another call
is received.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Call Waiting Sequence
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])

Caller ID Screen
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service can hear the prerecorded names of callers when they receive
calls (Caller ID Screening).

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1 System Features—3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

Notify of Transfer
If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service will hear "You have a call." when they answer transferred
calls.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer

Call Transfer to Outside

If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be transferred to a trunk via the following features: Custom Service,
Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Service.

Value Range
No, Yes

798 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Hospitality Mode
Hospitality Mode
Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled. (For use with
extensions for hotel rooms, etc.) This setting must be set to "Yes" to enable other Hospitality Mode settings.
When this item is set to "Yes", only the following options are made available to subscribers:
• Listen to Messages
• Password
• Personal Greetings
• Owner Name
Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

Password
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their password
when accessing their mailbox.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual References

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings— Mailbox Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual 799

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Personal Greeting
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their Personal
Greeting when accessing their mailbox.

Note
For the Personal Greeting of subscribers in a Class of Service with Hospitality mode enabled, only No
Answer and Busy greetings can be set.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings

Owner Name
Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change the mailbox
owner’s name when accessing their mailbox.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

Erase When Check Out - Password

Specifies if the password of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension
is set to the "Check Out" status.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

800 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

Erase When Check Out - Personal Greeting

Specifies if the Personal Greeting of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s
extension is set to the "Check Out" status.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

Erase When Check Out - Owner Name

Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber’s extension
is set to the "Check Out" status.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Guide References

2.23.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual 801

21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service

802 PC Programming Manual

 Section 22
UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk
Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 803

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Service Group
The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service Group
(therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break). One of 6
incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service, Fax, or Transfer to
Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Once one or more service groups are set, you can assign the service groups to each UM port in 22.2 UM
Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment.

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
Specifies the greeting to be heard by callers, the System Greeting, another message, or no greeting. The
System Greeting is "Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening. Welcome to the Unified Messaging
System.". Each call service can have its own setting.

Value Range
None, System, Others

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
Specifies the number of the greeting message to use when "Others" is specified for the greeting selection.

Value Range
1–32

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service

Specifies the incoming call service used to handle calls.

Value Range
Voice Mail Service, Automated Attendant, Interview Mailbox, Custom Service, Fax Service, Transfer to Mailbox

804 PC Programming Manual

 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
Specifies the parameter for the type of Incoming Call Service specified. This is disabled if "Voice Mail
Service" or "Automated Attendant" is selected for the Incoming Call Service.

Value Range
Interview Mailbox: Mailbox number
Custom Service: Custom Service number (1–200)
Fax Service: Mailbox number
Transfer to Mailbox: Mailbox number

Note
Mailbox numbers are between 2 digits and the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8).

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
Specifies the language of system prompts used by this call service. If set to "Primary", the default language
which is selected from all installed languages will be used. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his or her choice, provided the System Administrator or the Message Manager has recorded the
Multilingual Selection Menu. To specify a Prompt Selection Number, see 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System
Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting.

Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a prompt available for callers that cannot input DTMF
signals, such as rotary phone callers. See "Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers" below.

Value Range
Primary, Selective, Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

PC Programming Manual 805

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers
Specifies which language is used when a caller cannot enter any digits to select a language after the Multilingual
Selection Menu has been played. If set to "Primary", the default language which is selected from all installed
languages will be used.

Value Range
Primary, Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Delayed Answer Time

Specifies whether the Unified Messaging system answers calls on the port or trunk immediately (0) or after a
delay (1 s–60 s).

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

806 PC Programming Manual

 22.2 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

22.2 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Port Assignment
You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—
Service Group to each UM port.
1. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down list.
2. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 807

22.2 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

808 PC Programming Manual

 Section 23
UM Configuration—Service Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 809

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID /

PIN Call Routing
A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a
preprogrammed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break).
PIN Call Routing is only available when the Call Transfer Anytime of a Custom Service is set to "PIN".

Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs

• The wild card, " ", can be used as a substitute for any numbers in the following ways.
1. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include one " ":
" " matches any number, regardless of the actual numbers of digits. For example, registering " " by
itself matches all numbers, and registering "201 " matches any number that starts with "201".
2. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include more than one " ":
Each " " matches a single digit. For example, registering " " matches any 10-digit
number, and registering "201 " matches any 10-digit number that starts with "201".

Note
• If Automatic Login or Holiday Service is used, these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing settings.
Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service.
• Received Caller ID/PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first
registered number to last. When programming Caller ID/PIN routing, note the order of registration, and
remember that wild card entries should be entered after any specific routing entries.

Caller ID No. (Selection)

Specifies the Caller ID number setting so that callers are automatically forwarded to a preprogrammed
destination.

Value Range
Private, Out of Area, Long Distance, Others

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Caller ID No. (Other)

Specifies a Caller ID number (or range of numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number
or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a preprogrammed destination. Only specified if
Caller ID No. (Selection) is set to "Others".

Value Range
0–9, (Max. 20 digits)

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

810 PC Programming Manual

 23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Description
Specifies a name and/or description of the Caller ID number.

Note
When no data is specified in this parameter, the caller’s name will be automatically entered here if the
caller’s name is received from the telephone company.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Specifies the destination to which the call from an assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded. A
destination can be set for each time mode. To disable the setting, select "None". A Mailbox Group number can
be entered here instead of a mailbox number.

Value Range
None: disables this feature.
Custom Service Menu: forwards callers to the specified Custom Service menu.
Extension: forwards callers to the specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards callers to the specified mailbox.
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax service.

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

PIN No.
Specifies a PIN number (or range of PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") for callers from a specific number
or range of numbers that are to be automatically forwarded to a preprogrammed destination. For more
information on using " " with pin numbers, refer to Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs.

Value Range
0–9, (Max. 20 digits)

PC Programming Manual 811

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing

Description
Specifies a name and/or description of the PIN number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing

Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Specifies the destination to which the call using an assigned PIN number is automatically forwarded. A
destination can be set for each time mode. To disable the setting, select "None". A Mailbox Group number can
be entered here instead of a mailbox number.

Value Range
None: disables this feature.
Custom Service Menu: forwards callers to the specified Custom Service menu.
Extension: forwards callers to the specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards callers to the specified mailbox.
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax service.

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing

812 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—

Parameters
Automated Attendant
Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
Specifies the length of time the system waits for the caller to dial a digit before assuming the caller cannot input
a DTMF signal and therefore activates No DTMF Input Call Coverage

Value Range
0–20 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)

Specifies the number of times the system will play the Automated Attendant top menu if the caller does not
make a selection.

Value Range
1–5 times

Maintenance Console Location

23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—Service
Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Play Owner's Name during Transfer

Determines whether "Transferring you to (name)" is announced to the caller before transferring the caller to
an extension.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

PC Programming Manual 813

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Operator Service
When operator calls are made, calls are connected to the lowest-numbered operator that is available. To
enable/disable the operator setting for each time mode, check/uncheck it.

Note
• The extension assigned as Operator 1 for day mode is automatically designated as the Message
Manager. Because the extension number assigned for Operator Service No. 1 in the Day Mode is for
the Message Manager, you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialling [0], however, when setting features such
as Message Waiting Notification and Remote Call Forwarding, the extension number (not "0") must be
specified.

Value Range
Operator Service for Day, Operator Service for Night, Operator Service for Lunch, Operator Service for Break

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Operator Service—Operator’s Extension

Specifies the extension number for Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked time setting.

Note
• The default extension number of Operator 1 in day mode cannot be used with the Message Waiting
Notification Lamp feature.
• Because the extension number assigned as Day Mode Operator 1 is automatically designated as the
Message Manager, do not assign this extension number to a mailbox. This extension number is
automatically assigned to mailbox number 998.

Value Range
1–8 digits

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox

Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to leave a
message in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage Mode or No Answer Coverage Mode is set.

Value Range
2–8 digits

814 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode

Specifies how to handle calls when the operator is busy.

Value Range
Hold: Automatically places the caller on hold and the operator is called again.
No Answer Coverage: Offers the option specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
Call Waiting: Signals the operator when another call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of PBX.
Disconnect Message: Disconnects the caller after playing "Thank you for calling".

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode

Specifies how to handle operator calls when they are not answered within the time period set in Operator
Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s).

Value Range
Caller Select: Allows the caller to leave a message or call another extension. In the following cases, the caller
cannot call another extension:
a. No input to Automated Attendant.
b. When the No DTMF Input Operation setting of a Custom Service is set to "Operator".
Leave Message: Instructs the caller to leave a message in the operator’s mailbox.
Disconnect Message: Disconnects the caller after playing "Thank you for calling.".
Next Operator: Transfers the caller to the next operator.

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings— No DTMF Input Operation

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

PC Programming Manual 815

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

When a call to an operator is not answered within the time set, the system will offer other options as defined
by Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode.

Note
• This time applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
• If more than one operator is assigned, we recommend setting this value to 15 s.

Value Range
10–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Call Hold Mode

If Call Hold Mode is checked, the system gives callers the option of either holding for a specific extension or
selecting one of several Incomplete Call Handling Service options. While on hold, the system periodically gives
callers the choice to either continue to hold or select one of the Incomplete Call Handling Service options. If
Call Hold Mode is not checked, the system immediately offers callers the Incomplete Call Handling Service
and callers are not put on hold.

Value Range
Enable (checked), Disable (unchecked)

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode

If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue.
Example: "One other person is waiting to connect."

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

816 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

Specifies the interval between the voice guidance message that asks whether or not calls are to be retrieved
during call holding.
Example: "To cancel holding, press 2 now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party again."

Value Range
1–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Call Hold Mode—Redial Cancel Timing (s)

Specifies the interval between the voice guidance messages that ask if continuous redials are to be attempted
during call holding.
Example: "To continue holding, press 1. Otherwise, press 2."

Value Range
15, 30, 45, 60 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Alternate Extension
Specifies extensions that require a different transfer sequence than normal. Calls to these extensions will be
transferred according with the setting for 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—
PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T
X , ;]).Click Edit and follow the steps below to edit an alternate extension.

Adding an Alternate Extension

1. Click New.
2. Enter an extension number.
3. Click OK.
Editing an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate extension.

PC Programming Manual 817

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the extension number.
4. Click OK.
Deleting an Alternate Extension
1. Select the desired alternate extension.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
Changing the order of Alternate Extensions
Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list. Alternate extensions will
be dialled in order from top to bottom.

Note
Extension Groups and Logical Extensions cannot be assigned.

Value Range
Max. 32 extensions (max. 5 digits per extension)

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters— PBX Environment—Alternate Extension
Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

List All Names

If set to "Enable", callers can listen to all subscriber names and extension numbers in the Automated
Attendant service or Custom Service.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Operator Transfer Mode

Specifies the timing of the operator transfer.

818 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Value Range
Transfer immediately, Do not transfer immediately

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

No DTMF Input Operation

No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when there is no DTMF input in response to system guidance (for
example, the caller is using a rotary phone) for each time mode.

Value Range
G.D.M.: The caller is transferred to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Operator: The caller is transferred to an operator.
Mailbox: The caller is transferred to the designated mailbox extension.
Extension: The caller is transferred to the designated extension.

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.33 No DTMF Input Operation

No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Parameter)
Specifies the transfer destination if "Mailbox" or "Extension" is selected for No DTMF Input Call Coverage
for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break (Selection).

Value Range
2–8 digits (for extensions)
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits (for mailboxes)

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.33 No DTMF Input Operation

PC Programming Manual 819

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Name Entry
Number of Digits to Entry Name (3-4 digits)
Specifies the number of digits (letters) that must be entered when using the Dial by Name feature, which allows
callers to connect themselves with the desired party by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of the party’s name.

Value Range
3–4 digits

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Name Entry Time Out (1-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 digits (letters) of the
desired party’s name. If the required number of digits are not dialled within this time, the previous menu will
be played again for the caller.

Value Range
1–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Key Mode
Specifies the standard used for keypad text entry. If set to use the North American Standard, press [7] for
"Q" and [9] for "Z", If set to use the Australasian Standard, press [1] for "Q" and "Z".

Value Range
North American Standard, Australasian Standard

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

820 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Name Directory Mode

Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Both to be used when entering the name.

Value Range
Last, First, Both

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Toll Saver
Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are new messages.

Value Range
5–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are no new messages.

Value Range
5–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

PC Programming Manual 821

23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service

23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom

Service
A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones while
listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect themselves to
an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of an operator. A
Custom Service Menu ("Press 1 for Sales, press 2 for Service", etc.) can be recorded by the System Manager
or the Message Manager, and can be recorded in several languages if needed. The System Manager can
create a maximum of 200 Custom Services.
Common uses for Custom Services include:
– callers press a button to connect themselves with the desired destination
– callers press buttons to navigate through a series of other Custom Services before being connected with
the desired destination
– callers enter PIN numbers to connect themselves with the desired destination (PIN Call Routing)
– callers enter the first few letters of the desired parties (Dial by Name) to connect themselves with the desired
destination

Custom Service Builder

The Custom Service Builder is a utility that allows the System Administrator to create Custom Services visually.
Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited, arranged using a familiar drag-and-drop interface. The
following Custom Service types are available:
– Menu & Transfer
– Date Control
– Time Control
– Day Control
– Password

Creating a Custom Service

1. Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type.
2. Click on an area within the workspace to the right of the menu to place the Custom Service (it can be moved
later).
3. Double-click the Custom Service icon you placed in the grid.
4. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
5. Click OK.
Note
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, and you become unable to create new Custom Services with
the Custom Service Builder, click the browser’s Refresh button.

Editing a Custom Service

Custom Services parameters can be connected to other Custom Services. To connect a parameter to another
Custom Service, click and hold the parameter’s blue handle, drag it to the desired Custom Service, then release
the mouse button.
You can edit each Custom Service in the following ways.

[From the Custom Service List]

1. Enter the desired Custom Service number under Quick Search and click Edit Custom Service.
2. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
3. Click OK.

822 PC Programming Manual

 23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service

[From the Custom Service Diagram]

1. Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and select
Edit.
2. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
3. Click OK.
Example: Setting "Menu & Transfer"
1. Click Menu & Transfer under Custom Service Type and drag it to the right side of the screen.
2. Drop Menu & Transfer on to a position of your choice in the Custom Service diagram. The parameters
dialogue box for the Custom Service opens.
3. Enter or select a value for each item.
For each parameter, refer to the description in the following section.
4. Click Record A Prompt For This Custom Service.
This feature is only available when setting "Menu & Transfer" or "Password". You can also skip this step,
and go to step 7.
5. Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file.
When Record from extension is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When Import from recorded file is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 823

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—

Menu & Transfer
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated
party. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Prompt Mode
Specifies the language for prompts used by this Custom Service.

Note
• This parameter overrides a set "Incoming Call Service Prompt".
• If "Primary" is selected, the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used.
• If "None" is selected, the prompt mode of previous process will be continued, or "Primary" language
will be selected.

Value Range
None, Primary, Guidance No. 1-8

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

PC Programming Manual References

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break
Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

824 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3)

Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated for the caller.

Value Range
1–3 times

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Call Transfer Anytime

Specifies the type of dialling that the system accepts during the Custom Service in addition to the single-digit
Custom Service options. This setting allows callers to dial numbers to connect themselves to an extension or
mailbox or enter a PIN.

Note
If you only need to allow callers to dial single-digit Custom Service option numbers, set this parameter to
"No". When set to a value other than "No", the system always waits for the amount determined by the Wait
for Second Digit (1-5 s) setting before handling the call. This will cause a delay between the time the
caller dials a single-digit Custom Service option number and when the call is actually handled.

Value Range
Extension: enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialling the extension number.
Mailbox: enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number.
PIN: enables callers to be transferred directly to the specified party according to the setting for PIN Call Routing
Service by dialling a PIN.
No: disables extension transfer and mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries will function (following the Custom
Service menu)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Wait for First Digit (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to dial the first digit after a Custom Service menu
is played for the caller. If this time expires, the No DTMF Operation settings determines how the call is then
handled. If this parameter is set to "0", No DTMF Input Operation handles the call immediately after the menu
is played for the caller.

Value Range
0–10 s

PC Programming Manual 825

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Wait for Second Digit (1-5 s)

This parameter is only valid when Call Transfer Anytime is set to a value other than "No". After the caller dials
a digit (the first digit) after listening to a Custom Service menu, the system waits for a second digit to be dialled.
This gives the caller time to continue dialling a mailbox number, extension number, or PIN. If this time expires
without a second digit being entered, the system assumes the caller has selected a Custom Service menu
option and handles the call according to the digit dialled by the caller.

Value Range
1–5 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

No DTMF Input Operation

Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers after listening to the menu message
(most likely because they are using rotary telephones) The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller
to be automatically connected to an operator after the menu message plays back ("Press the desired number,
or stay on the line to be connected to an operator.").

Value Range
Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
Operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number. Enter the trunk access number of the
PBX then the destination telephone number.
Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller.
Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the previous menu (if there was a previous menu).
CS(Cust Serv): Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax service.

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

826 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #

Any of the 16 operations listed below can be assigned to the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the telephone
keypad. Callers are able to access these operations by pressing the corresponding keys on their telephones.

Value Range
Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox.
Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a specified extension.
Operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number. Enter the trunk access number of the
PBX then the destination telephone number.
Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller.
Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the previous menu (not available if there was no previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here.
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax service.
VM Serv: Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
Call Trf Serv: Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service.
Subscriber Serv: Allows the caller to access the Subscriber Service. The caller needs to press the assigned
key followed by the mailbox number that he or she wants to log in. If this option is enabled, it is strongly
recommended that each subscriber set a password for his or her mailbox; this will prevent unauthorised callers
from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
Dial by Name: Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a first or last name of the person the caller
wishes to reach, then transfers the caller to the corresponding extension.
Repeat Menu: Repeats the Custom Service menu.
Main Menu: Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu.
Trf to Fax Extn: Allows the caller to send fax messages to an extension specified as the fax extension.
List All Names: The system will announce the names and extensions numbers of all subscribers (except those
whose Class of Service Directory Listing parameter is set to "No").
None: No operation assigned.

Example: Assigning key [1] to transfer to extension 101

1. Click the check box next to key [1].
2. Select "Trf to Ext" in the "Assigned Operation" column.
3. Enter "101" in the "Value" column.
Example: Cancelling the setting for key [1]
1. Clear the check box next to key [1].

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 827

23.3.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

23.3.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—

Date Control
The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no selection
and no menu is announced.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Period 1–5, Outside

Period 1–5:
Specifies the name of date period for reference, start and end date, and an operation.

Outside:
Allows you to specify an operation that is enabled on all other dates not included in the set periods.

Value Range
Period 1–5:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Date: MM/DD (MM: Month, DD: Day)
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key – Assigned
Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, None (see
23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key – Assigned
Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

828 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 829

23.3.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

23.3.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—

Time Control
The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Period 1–5, Outside

Period 1–5:
Specifies the name of time period for reference, start and end time, and an operation.

Note
When the start time is specified and the end time is "None", the period will end at "00:00".

Outside:
Allows you to specify an operation that is enabled for all other times not included in the set time periods.

Value Range
Period 1–5:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Time: HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service,
None (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service,
None (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

830 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 831

23.3.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control

23.3.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—

Day Control
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Sunday–Saturday, Holiday
Specifies a service for each day of the week and for all holidays.

Note
If an operation is assigned to "Holiday" here, either one of the following settings is required in order to
activate the operation for the "Holiday" Custom Service:
a. In the Holiday Table, select "Custom Service Menu" and specify the number of this Date Control
—"Holiday" Custom Service, or the number of its higher layered Custom Service (see 23.4 UM
Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table).
b. Assign the desired Date Control—"Holiday" Custom Service or its higher layered Custom Service to
the desired Port/Trunk (see 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service
Group).
For "Port Affected/Trunk Affected", exclude the Port/Trunk numbers that are assigned to the Date
Control—"Holiday" Custom Service or the number of its higher layered Custom Service.

Value Range
Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key – Assigned Operation:
0–9, *, #)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

832 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—

Password
The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an operation.
If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s preprogrammed operation. The
prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.

Description
The information typed in this field is for reference only.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3)

Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated to the caller.

Value Range
1–3 times

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Wait for First Digit (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to dial the first digit after a Custom Service menu
is played for the caller. If this time expires, the No DTMF Operation setting determines how the call is then
handled.

Value Range
1–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

PC Programming Manual 833

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10)

Specifies the number of times an invalid password is entered before the operation assigned for Entry
Failure is executed.

Value Range
1–10 times

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

No DTMF Input Operation

Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers in response to system guidance (often
because they are rotary telephone users). The default setting is "Operator", which allows the caller to be
automatically connected to an operator after the message is played.

Value Range
Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, Fax Service (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration
—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— No DTMF Input Operation)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Entry Failure
Determines what operation is activated when a caller enters an invalid password X times. (X= the value set
for Maximum Number of Invalid Entry (1-10))

Value Range
Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key – Assigned Operation:
0–9, *, #)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

834 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Pass1–5, Cancel
Pass1–5:
Specifies a password and an operation for the specified password.

Cancel:
Determines the operation that is activated when a caller presses "#" to cancel password entry.

Value Range
Pass1–5:
Password: Max. 12 digits
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service,
None (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Cancel:
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
Subscriber Serv, Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service,
None (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer— Key –
Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Maintenance Console Location

23.3.5 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 835

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday

Table
Holidays can be set for and assigned to trunks and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is received from a
certain trunk or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned holiday, the call handling
settings for that holiday will be used. This screen is similar to the table found in 10.5 PBX Configuration—
System—Holiday Table. To copy programmed holiday information from 10.5 PBX Configuration—System
—Holiday Table to use in this table, click Copy From PBX Holiday Table. You can also access the PBX
Holiday Table directly by clicking the PBX Holiday Table link. A maximum of 24 different holidays can be
programmed.

Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Name of Holiday
Specifies the name of the holiday setting for later reference.

Value Range
Max. 32 Characters

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Start Date (Month Day)

Specifies the month and day of the holiday start date. Click the cell to display a calendar. Select a month using
the arrow buttons, and click on a day for the selected month.

Value Range
Month and Day

836 PC Programming Manual

 23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Start Time
Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service. Click the cell to display
an array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time.

Value Range
Hour and Minute

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

End Date (Month Day)

Specifies the month and day of the holiday end date. Click the cell to display a calendar. Select a month using
the arrow buttons, and click on a day for the selected month.

Value Range
Month and Day

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

End Time
Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to end the holiday service. Click the cell to display an
array of hours and minutes. Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time.

Value Range
Hour and Minute

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

PC Programming Manual 837

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Retain Holiday
If "Yes" is selected, the holiday will not end regardless of the end time setting. To end the holiday setting when
"Yes" is selected and the end time has already passed, set Setting to "Disable" or re-programme the settings
for the holiday.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Company Greeting No.

Specify the greeting callers hear when calling the affected trunks or ports during the holiday.

Value Range
None (do not playback): No greeting is heard.
No. 1–32: The selected company greeting is heard.
System Greeting: The following greeting is heard: "Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening. Welcome
to the Unified Messaging System".

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Service
One of 4 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service) can be
assigned to each holiday. After a greeting is played (if specified), the call will be transferred to the selected
service.

Value Range
Voice Mail Service: The caller is transferred to the Voice Mail Service.
Automated Attendant Service: The caller is transferred to the Automated Attendant Service.
Interview Mailbox: The caller is transferred to an Interview Mailbox.
Custom Service Menu: The caller is transferred to a Custom Service Menu.

838 PC Programming Manual

 23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Interview Mailbox/Custom Service Menu

If "Interview Mailbox" or "Custom Service Menu" was selected for Service, specify the Interview Mailbox or
Custom Service here.

Value Range
Interview Mailbox number, Custom Service number

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Trunk Affected
Specify which trunks will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for the
trunks to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all trunks. Click
OK to finish.

Value Range
Trunk No. 1–96, All

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Port Affected
Specify which UM ports will be subject to the holiday setting. Click Edit, and then select the check boxes for
the UM ports to be subject to the holiday setting, or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all UM
ports. Click OK to finish.

Value Range
Port No. 1–24, All

Maintenance Console Location

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

PC Programming Manual 839

23.4 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

840 PC Programming Manual

 Section 24
UM Configuration—System Parameters

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Parameters menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 841

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters

Mailbox Group
Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a message
and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all subscribers in the
group. The system can maintain a maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups. Each group can have a maximum of 200
members. For Personal Group Distribution Lists, see 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Personal
Distribution List.
Follow the steps below to create or edit a Mailbox Group.

Adding Mailbox Groups

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for the Mailbox Group.
3. Click OK.
Editing Mailboxes
To edit a mailbox group, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Group list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.
Adding Mailboxes to a Group
1. Under Group Members, click Edit for the group to add mailboxes to.
2. In the Subscribers To Add column, select the check boxes for the maibox numbers to add to the group.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.
Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialogue box
1. Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and that you have clicked
Apply since adding members to the group.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural

842 PC Programming Manual

 24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters

– A-law or µ-law encoding

3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.

Group List No.

Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This number is similar to a mailbox number and is used to send a
message to all subscribers of the group. It must be a unique number; no other group or mailbox can be assigned
this number.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.17 Group Distribution Lists

Group Name
Specifies the group name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.17 Group Distribution Lists

Extension Group
An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension
Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be
assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Up to 20 Extension Groups can be created, and each group can consist of 100 extensions (members). You
can add, delete, and review the extensions. Members of an Extension Group are able to share the same
mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification feature when a message is received.
Follow the steps below to edit an Extension Group.

Adding Extension Groups

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for the Extension Group.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 843

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters

Editing Extension Groups

To edit Extension Group settings, select the desired Group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Extension Group list.

Deleting Extension Groups

1. Select an Extension Group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.
Editing Extension Group Members
1. For "Extension No.", click Edit to open the Group Members window.
2. Click the icon.
3. Enter the extension to add in Extension, and click OK.
4. Click OK.
The table on this screen will list any extensions that cannot be added, as well as the reason that extension
cannot be added to the group (i.e. it is already in another extension group, etc.).

Group List No.

Specifies the Extension Group number.

Note
In order to configure an Extension Group, set a group number here, then assign the group number as the
owner of a mailbox. The Extension Group number is effectively the extension number that is the owner of
the group’s mailbox.

Value Range
2–8 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

Group Name
Specifies the group name.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

844 PC Programming Manual

 24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters

System Caller Name Announcement

Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 200 telephone numbers and record a caller name for
each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from one of
the preprogrammed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the preprogrammed
callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom (Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening feature is only available when the Caller ID Screen parameter of the subscriber’s Class
of Service is set to "Yes". This feature is also enabled when subscribers select "Call screening" as the Call
Transfer method (see 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status in the Feature Guide).
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom paging" as the Call Transfer method (see
3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status and/or 3.2.2 Subscriber Features—
3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service in the Feature Guide).
Follow the steps below to edit System Caller Name Announcements.

Adding a Caller Extension and Description

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Caller-ID No. and Description for the entry.
3. Click OK.
Editing Caller ID Entries
To edit an entry, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific parameters
directly from the list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select an entry.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.
Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information dialogue box
1. Select the desired Caller ID number and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that you have clicked Apply since you added the Caller ID No.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 845

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters

Caller-ID No.
Assigns the telephone number for which the system announces the prerecorded caller name to extension
users.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits consisting of 0–9

Maintenance Console Location

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

Description
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

846 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Daily Hours Setting
Clock Format
Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).

Note
The selected time format (12-hour or 24-hour) affects the time format of reports as well as the time that
appears in e-mail notifications for new messages.

Value Range
12 H, 24 H

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Morning Hours Start Time (HH:MM)

Specifies the starting time of the morning greeting.

Value Range
HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Afternoon Hours Start Time (HH:MM)

Specifies the starting time of the afternoon greeting.

Value Range
HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Evening Hours Start Time (HH:MM)

Specifies the starting time of the evening greeting.

PC Programming Manual 847

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
HH:MM (HH: Hour, MM: Minute)

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Prompt Setting
These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.

Primary Language
Specifies the default language to be used when another language is not selected in the Multilingual Selection
Menu.

Value Range
Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Language 1–5—Language (1–5)

Assigns a selection number (1–9) to each language. Callers use the numbers to select the desired languages
for their message prompts. This setting is required when either one or both of the following parameters are set
to "Selective":
a. Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
b. External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
For each selection of this setting, related items within "Language 1–5" can be set.

Value Range
Language 1–5

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

848 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode
- Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers
24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Language 1–5—Language
Specifies the language for the current language selection number.

Value Range
None, Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Language 1–5—DTMF
Specifies the number to be input to select the language set for the current language selection number.

Value Range
None, 1–9

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service
3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Selection Menu Wait Time (0-20 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for the caller to select a language by pressing the appropriate
dial key. If this time period expires without the selection number being entered, the system uses the Primary
Language.

Value Range
0–20 s

PC Programming Manual 849

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Selection Menu Repeat Cycle (1-3 times)

Specifies the number of times the system will play the Multilingual Selection Menu.

Value Range
1–3

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service

Delay Time After Connected Received for Incoming (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits after the line is connected for incoming calls
before playing the prompt.

Value Range
0–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Delay Time After Connected Received for Outgoing (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits after the line is connected for outgoing calls
before playing the prompt.

Value Range
0–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

850 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

System Guidance—System Guidance

Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language.
For each selection of this setting, related items within "System Guidance 1–8" can be set.

Value Range
Guidance No. 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting— Primary Language

System Guidance—Select Language—Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp

Specifies the position of the "AM/PM" announcement.

Value Range
Before: the system announces "AM/PM" before the time, such as P.M. 3:42.
After: the system announces "AM/PM" after the time, such as 3:42 P.M.
24-h: the system announces the time in 24-h format, such as 15:42.

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

System Guidance—Select Language—"O’clock" Prompt

Specifies when and if "O’clock" is announced.

Value Range
When at :00: the system announces "O’clock" only on the hour, such "one o’clock".
Always: the system announces "O’clock" always.
None: No announcement

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

System Guidance—Select Language—Month/Day Prompt

Specifies the order of the month and day for date announcements.

Value Range
MM:DD: Month and Day
DD:MM: Day and Month

PC Programming Manual 851

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

System Guidance—Select Language—# Announcement Mode

Specifies the way of announcement for the "#" character when "English (US)" or "English (UK)" is selected as
System Guidance.

Value Range
POUND, HASH

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Parameters
Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message
waiting lamps on extensions.

PBX Environment—Operator Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F

T X , ;])
Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to an operator’s extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Environment—Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R

F T X , ;])
Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to any extension except an operator’s extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection

852 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)

; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Environment—Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits /

[0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])
Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

PBX Environment—Call Waiting Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;])

Specifies the sequence for performing Call Waiting if the called extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual 853

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Environment—Waiting Time for Receiving Caller ID (0-10 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits before receiving Caller ID from the PBX.

Value Range
0–10 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Dialling Parameters
Number of Digits to Access Outside Line (0-8 digits)
This parameter should match the number of digits of the trunk access number required by the PBX when
making outside calls.
Example:
If the PBX requires callers to dial "9" to access a trunk, this parameter should be set as "1". This enables the
system to recognise that an outgoing call setup sequence is completed once the initial "9" has been dialled
(9-123-4567).

Value Range
0–8 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Call Transfer No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits before retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer
at the destination extension.

Note
Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call Forwarding
No Answer Time at the PBX. Otherwise, the PBX may forward the call immediately to the extension’s
Intercept Routing destination according to PBX programming, rather than return the call to the system.

Value Range
10–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

12.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension— FWD No Answer Time
12.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station— FWD No Answer Time

854 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits before concluding that there is no answer at the outside
number called.

Value Range
10–90 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Pause Time for "," (100-9900 ms, *100 ms)

Specifies the pause time for "," used in call sequences.

Value Range
100–9900 ms, in units of 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Pause Time for ";" (100-9900 ms, *100 ms)

Specifies the pause time for ";" used in call sequences.

Value Range
100–9900 ms, in units of 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Outside Call Setup Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T , ;])

Specifies the sequence of codes used by the system when calling a trunk. You can set a maximum of 16 digits.
The default value is "T". "T" indicates that the system will dial the telephone number only after detecting a dial
tone.
Example:
9, = (9) – 1 s wait – dial telephone number. "9" is the trunk access number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
0–9, , #: Dial Code

PC Programming Manual 855

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Message Waiting Notification

Determines how essential Message Waiting Notification features are carried out.

Outgoing Call UM Extensions

Specifies the port numbers used for Message Waiting Notification Device feature. The system makes outgoing
calls using the port specified in this parameter. At least 1 port must be specified.

Value Range
UM port extension number

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message

If set to "Yes", the system will turn on the Message Waiting Lamp of the extension each time a new message
is recorded in the mailbox. This will occur even if the Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a previous
message. This setting is useful when the first attempt is unsuccessful. If set to "No", the system will turn on
the Message Waiting Lamp for the first message only. The system will not turn on the lamp for subsequent
messages until the subscriber has accessed the system to retrieve the messages stored there.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

Specifies a callback number to be displayed with text reports of messages waiting notifications. The system
callback number is displayed when the caller does not enter his or her telephone number when prompted by
the system.

856 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
Max. 32 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

External Message Delivery

Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out.

Retry Times (times)

Specifies the number of times the system will attempt to deliver an external message when the destination is
busy or does not answer.

Value Range
0–3 times (E/NE: 0–4 times, NZ: 0–5 times, C: 0–9 times, Taiwan/Malaysia: 0–2 times)

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

Busy Delay (min)

Specifies the length of time (in minutes) the system waits to try to deliver an external message again when the
destination is busy.

Value Range
1–60 min (Malaysia: 2–120 min)

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

No Answer Delay (min)

Specifies the length of time (in minutes) the system waits to try to deliver an external message again when the
destination is not answering.

PC Programming Manual 857

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
60–120 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

Outgoing Call UM Extensions

Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature.

Value Range
UM port extension number

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

9.7 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—UM Port Property

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

Message Length
Specifies the maximum length (in minutes) of messages recorded for the External Delivery Message.

Value Range
1–6 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

Max. Messages for Mailboxes (1-100 msgs)

Specifies the maximum number of External Delivery Messages that can be stored in one mailbox.

Value Range
1–100

858 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

System External Message Delivery Duration Time (1-9 min)

Specifies the maximum length of External Message Delivery calls. The timer begins counting when the called
party answers the call, and if the called party has not pressed the appropriate dial key to initiate message
playback, the system terminates the call when this timer expires.

Value Range
1–9 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

Company Telephone No. (Up to 32 digits)

Specifies the company’s telephone number. When the recipient has failed to retrieve the sender’s message
because of he or she did not enter the correct password, the system announces the company’s telephone
number to the caller. The caller can later call the company for assistance or to speak to the message sender.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Intercom Paging Parameters

Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX. It
allows the system to page the called party (announce the caller’s name, line number, etc.) while the caller is
placed on hold. To utilise this feature, Intercom Paging must be available for the PBX, and the Unified
Messaging system must be properly programmed.

No Answer Time for Intercom Paging (1-30 s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the system waits before concluding Intercom Paging when there is
no answer. The system will return to the caller if the paged party does not respond before this timer expires.

Value Range
1–30 s

PC Programming Manual 859

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Announcement Repeat Cycle (1-3 times)

Specifies the number of times the system announces the page.

Example:
"I have a call for (name)".

Value Range
1–3 times

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Intercom Paging Retry (1-10 times)

Specifies the number of times to retry paging when the called subscriber has set Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer/ Incomplete Call Handling for Busy to "Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging" and
the subscriber is busy or if there is no answer.

Value Range
1–10 times

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual References

20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings— Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings— Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Caller Recorded Name Announce Mode

Determines whether or not the system announces the caller’s name during paging. (In order for the name to
be announced, it must be recorded beforehand.)

860 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Fax Management
You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax
extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax extension
is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.

Automatic Transfer of Incoming Fax Call

Specifies the detection and destination of incoming fax calls.

Note
The system can detect incoming fax signals during the first 30 seconds after it answers incoming calls.

Value Range
Disable, Transfer to Fax Extension, Receive Fax

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Automatic Transfer of Incoming Fax Call—Mailbox Number

Specifies the mailbox to receive the fax if "Receive Fax" is selected for Automatic Transfer of Incoming
Fax Call.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

PC Programming Manual 861

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Main Fax Extension No. (1-8 digits)

Specifies the extension number of the main fax machine.

Value Range
1–8 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Alternate Fax Extension No. (1-8 digits)

Specifies the extension number of the alternate fax machine. When the main fax extension is busy or does not
answer within the time specified under Fax No Answer Time (5-60s) , the system forwards the fax call to
the alternate fax extension.

Value Range
1–8 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax No Answer Time (5-60s)

Specifies the length of time (in seconds) that the system waits for the main or alternate fax extension to answer
a fax call before taking other action, such as notifying the Fax Manager that the fax could not be received.

Value Range
5–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

862 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Fax Manager Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the Fax Manager. The system will notify the Fax Manager of the status of fax
calls depending upon the settings of the Fax No Answer Coverage Mode and Fax Notification Mode
parameters.

Value Range
2–[the value set in Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)] digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax No Answer Coverage Mode

Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call could not be answered by the main or
alternate fax extension. The system can announce to the Fax Manager the number of unanswered fax calls.
The number announced is the number of unanswered fax calls since the last time the system notified the Fax
Manager. This announcement is heard when the Fax Manager logs in to his or her mailbox.

Value Range
No: The system will not notify the Fax Manager when fax calls were not answered.
Mailbox: The system will announce the number of unanswered fax calls to the Fax Manager when the Fax
Manager logs in to his or her mailbox.
Extension: The system will announce the number of unanswered fax calls to the Fax Manager by calling the
Fax Manager’s extension.

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Notification Mode

Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call is successfully received by the main or
alternate fax extension. The system can announce to the Fax Manager the number of received fax calls. The
number announced is the number of received fax calls since the last time the system notified the Fax Manager.

Value Range
No: The system will not notify the Fax Manager when fax calls are answered.
Mailbox: The system will announce the number of successfully received fax calls to the Fax Manager when
the Fax Manager logs in to his or her mailbox.
Extension: The system will announce the number of successfully received fax calls to the Fax Manager by
calling the Fax Manager’s extension.

PC Programming Manual 863

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Mailbox for Fax Receiving

If a DISA line detects a fax tone and forwards the call to the UM group’s floating extension number, the call is
forwarded to the specified mailbox.

Value Range
Mailbox no. (2–8 digits)

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer
3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—System Name (Up to 25 characters)

Specifies the system name for the fax server. This name will appear on the cover page of fax messages sent
by the fax server.

Value Range
Max. 25 characters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—System Fax Number (Max. 20 digits)

Specifies the system fax number for the fax server. This number will appear on the cover page of fax messages
sent by the fax server.

Value Range
Max. 20 digits

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

864 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Number of Retries (0-99)

Specifies the number of times a fax will be re-sent if initial sending fails. If the fax cannot be sent within the set
number of retries, a non-delivery notification voice message will be sent to the target mailbox.

Value Range
0–99 times

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Retry Interval (1-60 min)

Specifies the interval between retries when the initial sending of a fax fails.

Value Range
1–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Page Retransmission

Specifies if a document will be re-transmitted if for any reason the fax transmission is interrupted.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

PC Programming Manual 865

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Fax Properties—Page Retransmission—Retransmission Start Page

Specifies the starting page of a fax transmission that was interrupted and is being re-transmitted.

Value Range
From First Page: The entire fax document is re-transmitted.
From Error Page: The fax document is re-transmitted, starting from the page that was interrupted.

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Day Mode - Delayed Answer Time

Specifies the amount of time the system waits before going off-hook when receiving a call.

Value Range
0–255 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Response Wait Interval (s)

Specifies the amount of time the system will wait for an answer when trying to send a fax.

Value Range
0–90 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Printed Information

Specifies the information printed on the cover page of sent faxes.

866 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
LOG ID: The cover page will include the time of sending, sender information, the sender’s fax number (System
Fax Number), and the number of pages.
From/To: The cover page will include the time of sending, sender information, the receiver’s name and/or fax
number, and the number of pages.

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Printed Information Position

Specifies where the printed information for the fax is positioned

Value Range
Inside: Printed information is positioned inside the print area of the fax document.
Outside: Printed information is positioned outside of the margins of the print area of the fax document.

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Cover Page

Specifies if sent faxes will have a cover page attached. If "Default Cover Page" is selected, the cover page
includes the following information:
• Title: "FACSIMILE COVER SHEET"
• Sending start time.
• Receiver’s name
• System name and system fax number of sender
• Number of pages sent
Value Range
Default Cover Page, No Cover Page

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

PC Programming Manual 867

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Fax Properties—No Space for Receiving Coverage Mode

When the system’s recording capacity is full and cannot receive faxes, the system can transfer incoming faxes
to a fax extension, or not answer the incoming call (not go off-hook).

Value Range
Transfer to Fax Extension, No Receiving

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Fax Properties—Fax Busy Coverage Mode

When the system is busy and cannot receive faxes, the system can transfer incoming faxes to a fax extension,
or not answer the incoming call (the extension will be busy).

Value Range
Transfer to Fax Extension, No Receiving

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.1.3 Fax Server

Disconnect Parameters
Maximum Silence Time
Specifies the length of silence detected by the system before the system disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maximum Continuous Tone Time (0-60 s)

Specifies the length of time the system waits when a continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–60 s

868 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maximum Cyclic Tone Time

Specifies the length of time the system waits when a cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maximum Call Duration (0-60 min)

Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of
time, it terminates the call. Calls will not be terminated while playing or recording messages. If this setting is
set to "0", calls will not be terminated.

Value Range
0–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Transfer to Outside
These parameters determine how the system will transfer calls to a trunk via the following features: Call
Transfer Service, Custom Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call-through Service.

Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16

digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual 869

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * #

D F R T , ; N A])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks using EFA (External Feature Access). This
setting should match the settings of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on Busy (Up

to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to reconnect the line when the party transferred with EFA (External
Feature Access) is busy. This setting should match the settings of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Outside Transfer Sequence—EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on No Answer

(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N A])
Specifies the sequence the system uses to reconnect the line when the party transferred with EFA (External
Feature Access) does not answer. This setting should match the settings of the PBX.

870 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Answer Mode

Specifies the answering method the system uses to detect whether the destination party has answered the
transferred trunk call.

Value Range
Guidance: The system plays the following guidance before connecting the line to the destination party: "You
have a call. To answer the call, press [1]. Otherwise, press [2] and hang up." If the destination party presses
"1", he or she will be able to answer the transferred trunk call. The system continues playing this guidance for
the time specified in Outgoing Call No Answer Time (10-90 s) in Dialling Parameters. If the transferred
party does not answer the call within this time, the system considers it as a No Answer call.
Analyze: The system monitors the status of the trunk, recognises that the destination party goes off-hook, and
connects the line.

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Trunk Group 1–96

Specifies a trunk group for making settings for EFA Transfer, Caller ID Callback, and Outside Line Access
Sequence for Caller ID Callback. Selecting different trunk groups from this drop-down list allows settings to be
made for each trunk group.

Value Range
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual 871

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Trunk Group 1–96—EFA Transfer

Specifies whether or not the system uses EFA (External Feature Access) when transferring incoming trunk
calls to another trunk. If set to "Enable", the system transfers incoming trunk calls to another trunk according
to "EFA Transfer Sequence" specified in "Transfer to Outside". If set to "Disable", the system transfers incoming
trunks calls to another trunk according to Outside Transfer Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside
Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N]) specified in Transfer to Outside.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Trunk Group 1–96—Caller ID Callback

Specifies whether or not the system allows a subscriber to call back the party who left a message in his or her
mailbox by using the caller ID information sent from the PBX. This setting applies to the trunk number used
when the message with Caller ID information was left in his or her mailbox.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Trunk Group 1–96—Outside Line Access Sequence for Caller ID Callback (Up
to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; ])
Specifies the sequence of trunk access numbers for Caller ID Callback. This parameter is available when the
system executes Caller ID Callback without using EFA.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
; : Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
0–9, , #: Dial Code

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Number of Digits in Telephone Number (1-20)

Specifies the number of digits for local area telephone numbers. According to this parameter, telephone
numbers dialled by the system can be distinguished as either local calls or long distance calls.

872 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Value Range
1–20

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

E-mail Option
E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages
or fax message data as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in order
for the system to use E-mail Integration features.

Mail Address
Specifies the mail address of the Unified Messaging system.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Full Name (Up to 64 ASCII characters)

Specifies the full name that will appear in e-mail messages sent by the Unified Messaging system.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Maximum Message Length (Selection)

Specifies whether voice messages sent as e-mail attachments will have a limit to their length.

Value Range
Unlimited, Other

PC Programming Manual 873

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Maximum Message Length (Other)

Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e-mail attachments.

Note
If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting, surplus parts of the message may be discarded
when sending the e-mail.

Value Range
1–30 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Message Client
Password Lockup Time (5-60 min)
Specifies the amount of time access will be locked after a password has been incorrectly entered 3 consecutive
times.

Value Range
5–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Mailbox
Mailbox No. Max. Length (3-8)
Specifies the maximum allowed number of digits for a mailbox number.

Note
This setting cannot be changed to a smaller value if mailboxes exist with a number of digits greater than
that smaller value. Those mailboxes must be re-numbered or deleted before this setting can be changed
to a smaller value.

Value Range
3–8 digits

874 PC Programming Manual

 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

Maintenance Console Location

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

PC Programming Manual 875

24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters

876 PC Programming Manual

 Section 25
UM Configuration—H/W Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 877

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings

Global Parameters
Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations.

Maximum Time to Wait for Dial Tone (500-20000 ms, *100 ms)
Specifies the length of time that the system waits for dial tone detection.

Value Range
500–20000 ms, in units of 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings—Global Parameters

Dial Start Mode

Specifies whether dialling starts after a dial tone is detected or after the time specified in Offhook Delay
(500-20000 ms, *100 ms) has passed.

Value Range
Dial Tone Mode, Delay Mode

Maintenance Console Location

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings—Global Parameters

Offhook Delay (500-20000 ms, *100 ms)

Specifies the length of time that passes before dialling starts. This setting is only needed when Dial Start
Mode is set to "Delay Mode".

Value Range
500-20000 ms, in units of 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings—Global Parameters

Delay After Dialing Before Onhook (0-250 s)

Specifies the length of time that the system waits for an answer when making an outside call. If no answer is
detected, the system disconnects the call.

Value Range
0–250 s

Maintenance Console Location

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings—Global Parameters

878 PC Programming Manual

 25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings

DTMF Cut Length (0-500 ms)

Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be deleted when it is detected while recording.

Value Range
0–500 ms

Maintenance Console Location

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings—Global Parameters

Minimum Message Length (0-9 s)

Specifies the minimum message recording length. Messages shorter than the specified minimum recording
length are discarded from the mailbox.

Value Range
0–9 s

Maintenance Console Location

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings—Global Parameters

PC Programming Manual 879

25.1 UM Configuration—H/W Settings

880 PC Programming Manual

 Section 26
UM Configuration—System Security

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 881

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

Manager
Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times)
Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered, when the System Manager or Message
Manager tries to log in to the system using a telephone, before the call is disconnected.

Value Range
1–99 times

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

System Manager Access from Telephone

Enables or disables access to the Unified Messaging system from the System Manager’s telephone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

Password for System Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)

If "Enable" is selected in System Manager Access from Telephone, assign a numerical password here
for the System Manager to login to the system.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Password for System Manager (Message Client)

Specifies the password for the System Manager for accessing the Unified Messaging system from the
messaging client.

Value Range
4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9)

882 PC Programming Manual

 26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Message Manager Access from Telephone

Enables or disables access to the system from the Message Manager’s telephone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Password for System Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)

If "Enable" is selected in Message Manager Access from Telephone, assign a numerical password here
for the System Manager to login to the system.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Password for Message Manager (Message Client)

Specifies the password for the Message Manager for accessing the Unified Messaging system from the
messaging client.

Value Range
4–16 characters (A–Z, a–z, 1–9)

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Manager

PC Programming Manual 883

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Subscriber
Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits)
Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) of mailbox passwords.

Value Range
0–16 digits

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Enable Login Failure Disconnection

Specifies whether the system disconnects a call when the subscriber enters an invalid password n times. (n=the
value specified under Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times))

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Login Failures before Disconnection (1-99 times)

Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered before the system disconnects the call. In
order to use this feature, Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be set to "Enable".

Value Range
1–99 times

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Default Password for New Mailboxes

Specifies whether the default password is assigned to new mailboxes automatically when they are created.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

884 PC Programming Manual

 26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Default Password
Specifies the type of default password to be used.

Value Range
Fix digit (which length is minimum password length), Prefix (1 or 2 digits) + Mailbox No

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Default Password—Fix digit (which length is minimum password length)

Specifies a fixed password for all new mailboxes. The number of digits in the password must be equal or greater
than the value specified in Minimum Password Length (0-16 digits).

Value Range
Max. 16 digits

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

Default Password—Prefix (1 or 2 digits) + Mailbox No

Specifies the default password for new mailboxes as a combination of fixed digits (1 or 2 digits) and the mailbox
number.

Value Range
1 digit: 0–9 + Mailbox No.
2 digits: 00–99 + Mailbox No.

Maintenance Console Location

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security—Subscriber

PC Programming Manual 885

26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

886 PC Programming Manual

 Section 27
Network Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 887

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

Basic Settings
LAN Setting—DHCP Port Number
Specifies the port number of the DHCP client. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain
an IP address automatically is selected.

Value Range
68, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

LAN Setting—Obtain an IP address automatically/Use the following IP address

Specifies whether to enable the DHCP server to assign IP address information automatically to the mother
board, or to enter the information manually.

Value Range
Obtain an IP address automatically, Use the following IP address

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

Feature Guide References

5.5.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

LAN Setting—IP Address

Specifies the IP address of the mother board. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use
the following IP address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

LAN Setting—MAC Address

Indicates the MAC address of the mother board (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

888 PC Programming Manual

 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

LAN Setting—Subnet Mask

Specifies the network mask address of the mother board. This parameter is only available for entering values
when Use the following IP address is selected.

Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

LAN Setting—Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network. This parameter is only available for entering
values when Use the following IP address is selected.

Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

DNS Setting—Port Number

Specifies the port number of the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain
DNS server address automatically is selected.

Value Range
53, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

DNS Setting—Obtain DNS server address automatically/Use the following DNS

server address
Specifies whether to enable the DHCP server to assign DNS server address information automatically to the
mother board, or to enter the information manually.

Value Range
Obtain DNS server address automatically, Use the following DNS server address

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

PC Programming Manual 889

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

Feature Guide References

5.5.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP Address

Specifies the preferred IP address for the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values
when Use the following DNS server address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP Address

Specifies the alternative IP address for the DNS server. This parameter is only available for entering values
when Use the following DNS server address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

DSP IP Setting—Obtain DSP IP address automatically/Use the following DSP IP

address
Specifies whether the DHCP server assigns IP address information automatically to the DSP card(s), or to
enter the information manually.

Value Range
Obtain DSP IP address automatically, Use the following DSP IP address

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

DSP IP Setting—DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2

- 2—IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the
following DSP IP address is selected.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

890 PC Programming Manual

 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

DSP IP Setting—DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2

- 2—MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings

Advanced Settings
LAN Port—Speed & Duplex
Specifies the connection mode of the main port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto
negotiation fails.

Value Range
Auto: Automatic mode selection
1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
1000M-Half: 1000 Mbps/half duplex
100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings

Maintenance Port—Speed & Duplex

Specifies the connection mode of the maintenance port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when
Auto negotiation fails. This setting is available at Installer level only.

Value Range
Auto: Automatic mode selection
1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
1000M-Half: 1000 Mbps/half duplex
100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings

PC Programming Manual 891

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

Port Mirroring—Packet kind for mirroring

Specifies the types of packets used for port mirroring. This setting is available at Installer level only.

Value Range
Disable
LAN (All packets)
LAN (Data packets PBX)
LAN (Voice packets)

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Advanced Settings

Reference
The items displayed in this tab are the settings obtained from a DHCP server by the DHCP client of the PBX.
They are for reference only.

Assigned IP Address—IP Address

Indicates the assigned IP address of the mother board (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

Assigned IP Address—MAC Address

Indicates the MAC address of the mother board (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

Assigned IP Address—Subnet Mask

Indicates the network mask address of the mother board (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

Assigned IP Address—Default Gateway

Indicates the assigned IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

892 PC Programming Manual

 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports

Assigned DNS Server Address—Preferred DNS IP Address

Indicates the assigned IP address for the preferred DNS server (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

Assigned DNS Server Address—Alternative DNS IP Address

Indicates the assigned IP address for the alternative DNS server (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—IP Address
Indicates the IP address assigned for an installed optional DSP card (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—Subnet Mask
Indicates the Subnet Mask address of the DSP card (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—Default

Gateway
Indicates the Default Gateway address of the DSP card (reference only).

Maintenance Console Location

27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Reference

PC Programming Manual 893

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

27.2 Network Service—Server Feature

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed.

DHCP Server
DHCP Server
Specifies if the DHCP server functions of the PBX are enabled or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Port Number
Specifies the port number used for the DHCP server.

Value Range
67, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

IP address auto assignment

Starting IP address
Specifies the starting IP address for the assignable range of IP addresses.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Ending IP address
Specifies the ending IP address for the assignable range of IP addresses.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

894 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Lease interval (h)

Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an unlimited lease duration.

Value Range
1–168 (hours)

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Auto assignment exclusions

Up to 16 IP Addresses can be specified that will not be automatically assigned.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

IP Address Static Assignment

MAC Address
Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

IP Address
Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

PC Programming Manual 895

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

IP Address Assignment List

MAC Address
Specifies MAC addresses currently specified by the system.

Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

IP Address
Specifies IP addresses currently assigned by the system.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Remaining lease time

Specifies the remaining lease time for the MAC address/IP address pair.

Value Range
1–85777 s

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

896 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed.

FTP Server
Enables or disables the PBX’s FTP server function.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

Connection Control—Control Port number

Specifies the port number for connecting to the PBX’s FTP server.

Value Range
21, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

Data transfer port—Port number (Minimum)

Specifies the minimum port number for FTP data transfer.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

Data transfer port—Port number (Maximum)

Specifies the maximum port number for FTP data transfer.

Value Range
1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

User Information—User Name

Specifies the user name for the PBX’s FTP server authentication.

PC Programming Manual 897

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

Note
Be sure to change the user name from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the user
name regularly.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a letter (a–z).

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

User Information—Password
Specifies the password for the PBX’s FTP server authentication.

Note
Be sure to change the password from its initial, default value. Also, for security reasons, change the
password regularly.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a letter or number.

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.2 Network Service—Server Feature—FTP

898 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP

27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP

HTTP server settings can be programmed.

HTTP (LAN / MNT)—Port Number

Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using the LAN or MNT ports. This port is used for accessing
the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming.

Value Range
80, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP

HTTPs (LAN / MNT)—HTTPs server

Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the LAN or MNT ports using the PBX’s HTTP server function.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP

HTTPs (LAN / MNT)—Port Number

Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections. This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web
Maintenance Console programming when using an SSL connection.

Value Range
443, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP

Automatic logout Timer (min)

Specifies the amount of time required to elapse before logging off an inactive connection from the HTTP server.

Value Range
5, 10, 30, 60´n (n=1–24) (minutes)

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.3 Network Service—Server Feature—HTTP

PC Programming Manual 899

27.2.4 Network Service—Server Feature—NTP

27.2.4 Network Service—Server Feature—NTP

NTP server settings can be programmed.

NTP server
Enables or disables NTP service with the PBX’s NTP server for connections over the LAN or NTP ports.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.4 Network Service—Server Feature—NTP

900 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed.

Mail sending—Mail sender information name

Specifies the name to be used as the sender of the e-mails from the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Mail sending—Mail Address

Specifies the sending e-mail address for messages sent from the PBX. This address, for example, could be
set as the e-mail address of an administrator.

Value Range
Max. 128 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

SMTP server for relay—SMTP server address

Specifies the IP address or host name of the SMTP server to be used to send e-mails.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 128 characters (host name)

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

SMTP server for relay—SMTP server Port number

Specifies the port number of the SMTP server to be used to send e-mails.

Value Range
25, 465, 587, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

SMTP server for relay—SMTP over TLS

Specifies whether the SMTP server uses Transport Layer Security.

PC Programming Manual 901

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

SMTP Authentication—SMTP Authentication

Specifies whether authentication on the SMTP server is enabled.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

SMTP Authentication—User Name

Specifies the user name required to access the SMTP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

SMTP Authentication—Password
Specifies the password required to access the SMTP server.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

POP before SMTP—POP before SMTP

Specifies whether POP before SMTP is enabled on the SMTP server.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

902 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

POP before SMTP—POP server address

Specifies the IP address or host name of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 128 characters (host name)

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

POP before SMTP—POP server Port number

Specifies the port number of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
110, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

POP before SMTP—User Name

Specifies the user name for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

POP before SMTP—Password

Specifies the password for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Mail Receiving—SMTP Authentication

Specifies if SMTP authentication is enabled for mail receiving.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

PC Programming Manual 903

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Mail Receiving—SMTP over TLS

Specifies whether mail receiving uses Transport Layer Security for SMTP.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Mail Receiving—Receive Port number (SMTPs)

Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTPs.

Value Range
25, 465, 587, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Mail Receiving—Receive Port number (SMTP)

Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTP.

Value Range
25, 465, 587, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

904 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed.

IMAP4—IMAP4 server
Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

IMAP4—Port Number
Specifies a port number for the IMAP server. The default value is 143.

Value Range
143, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

IMAP4 over SSL—IMAP4 over SSL

Specifies whether to enable SSL encryption for the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

IMAP4 over SSL—Port Number

Specifies a port number for the IMAP server when using SSL encryption. The default value is 993.

Value Range
993, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

CAPABILITY command—Supporting IDLE response

Specifies whether the IMAP4 server will respond to IDLE commands sent by clients.

PC Programming Manual 905

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

Authenticated Connection Timeout—Authenticated Connection Timeout (min)

Specifies the amount of time of no activity that is required before an authenticated connection to the IMAP4
server will be disconnected.

Value Range
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 60 (min)

Maintenance Console Location

27.2.6 Network Service—Server Feature—IMAP4

906 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

27.3 Network Service—Client Feature

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections.

Connection 1—Connection 5
Connection Name
Specifies the name of the connection to use for programming in other items.

Value Range
Max. 64 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the FTP site. Click the IP Address radio button when this is used.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

Name
Specifies the name of the FTP site. Click the Name radio button when this is used.

Value Range
FTP site name (max. 253 characters)

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

Server Port Number

Specifies the port number used to connect to the FTP site.

Value Range
21, 990, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

PC Programming Manual 907

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

User Name
Specifies the user name required to log in to the FTP site.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
• The first character must be a letter or number.
• $ may only be used as the final character.

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

Password
Specifies the password for the user name required to log in to the FTP site.

Value Range
Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9, =, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a letter, number, or =.

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

Protocol
Specifies the communication protocol for the FTP connection.

Value Range
FTP, FTPS (Explicit), FTPS (Implicit)

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.1 Network Service—Client Feature—FTP

908 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog

27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog

Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection.

Remote Syslog
Specifies whether an external Syslog server will be used with the PBX.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog

Remote Syslog server—IP Address / Host Name

Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP address), Max. 253 characters (host name)

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog

Port
Specifies the connection port for the remote Syslog server.

Value Range
514, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog

PC Programming Manual 909

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager
to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity.
The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
This option is only available at Installer level.

SNMP Agent
Enables the PBX to use its SNMP agent function.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP Version
Specifies the version of the SNMP protocol to use.

Value Range
SNMP V1, SNMP V2c

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP Manager Port

Specifies the SNMP manager port.

Value Range
161, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

910 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

MIB info—SysContact
Specifies the name and contact information of the system administrator.

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

MIB info—SysName
Specifies the administrative name for the system.

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

MIB info—SysLocation
Specifies the physical location for the system.

Value Range
Max. 255 characters

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

SNMP Manager #1 / SNMP Manager #2

It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity can
be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen.
This option is only available at Installer level.

PC Programming Manual 911

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of an SNMP manager. Click the button next to IP Address and enter the address.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Host Name
Specifies the host name of an SNMP manager. Click the button next to Host Name and enter a name.

Value Range
Max. 253 characters (host name)

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Trap port
Specifies a port number used to send trap messages from the agent to an SNMP manager.

Value Range
162, 1024–65535

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Community Name
Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager.

Value Range
Max. 32 characters

912 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

TRAP filtering—Standard TRAP

Selects whether the PBX sends standard trap messages to an SNMP manager or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

TRAP filtering—enterpriseSpecific (Major)

Selects whether the PBX sends Major Alarm trap messages to an SNMP manager or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

TRAP filtering—enterpriseSpecific (Minor)

Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm trap messages to an SNMP manager or not.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

PC Programming Manual 913

27.4.1 Network Service—Other—Security

27.4 Network Service—Other

27.4.1 Network Service—Other—Security

Network security settings can be programmed.

ICMP ECHO Reply—LAN Port

Specifies if the LAN port will send ICMP echo-replies to incoming ICMP echo-requests.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.4.1 Network Service—Other—Security

ICMP ECHO Reply—Log output

Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo-replies.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

27.4.1 Network Service—Other—Security

SSL/TLS—Encryption suite
Specifies the method of encryption used for SSL/TLS.

Value Range
AES256-SHA, DES-CBC3-SHA, AES128-SHA, DES-CBC-SHA

Maintenance Console Location

27.4.1 Network Service—Other—Security

914 PC Programming Manual

Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual 915

Feature Programming References

Absent Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set /
Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent
Message
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent
Message
• 14.5 PBX Configuration—Feature—Absent Message

Feature Guide References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Account Code Entry
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Account Code
Mode

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Automatic Callback Busy
Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Automatic Callback
Busy

Feature Guide References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Dial—Extension First Digit
– Dial—Extension Inter-digit
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

Feature Guide References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

916 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Automatic Fax Delivery

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options
– Automatic Delivery Status
– Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ]
– Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Automatic Fax Transfer

• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Fax Extension

Feature Guide References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• 6.6 Tool—Import
– ARS - Leading Digit
– ARS - Except Code
– ARS - Routing Plan
• 6.7 Tool—Export
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension
Inter-digit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS
Itemised Code
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS
Itemised Code
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code— Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• Section 16 PBX Configuration—ARS
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

Feature Guide References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
• 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— Automatic Time
Adjustment—Automatic Time Correction on Stand-alone mode
• 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

5.4.5 Automatic Setup

Background Music (BGM)

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– External BGM On / Off
– BGM Set / Cancel

PC Programming Manual 917

Feature Programming References

• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

– External MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Budget Management
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code— Budget Management
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge— Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Call Billing for Guest Room

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge— Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Feature Guide References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Call Charge Services

• 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
– Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
– Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Feature Guide References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Call Distribution Port Group

• 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—
Hunt Pattern 1–16— Leading Number
• 9.11.2 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—
Hunt Pattern 1–16— Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th

918 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 9.12 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW16—Port Property— Call Distribution Port

Group

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF (MSN)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— CF (MSN)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Call Forwarding (FWD)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer Timer Set
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
– Manager— Group Forward Set
– Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log /
Group FWD
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND

PC Programming Manual 919

Feature Programming References

• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Hold
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Hold Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
– Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
– Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
– Option 1— PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
– Option 5— SLT—SLT Hold Mode

Feature Guide References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN Hold
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Monitor
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Data Mode
– Option 3— Executive Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters
– Recall—Call Park Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

920 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Feature Guide References

2.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Call Pickup
– Directed Call Pickup
– Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4
• 11.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Call Pickup Group
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup
Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup
Deny

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer
Recall
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
– Assistant— Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4— DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for
Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer
Recall Destination
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer
Recall Destination

Feature Guide References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

PC Programming Manual 921

Feature Programming References

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Call Waiting
• 9.23 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
– Automatic Call Waiting
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 5— Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting
for Extension Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Caller ID—Visual Caller ID
Display
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

922 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Caller ID
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– Caller ID—Waiting to receive
– Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call through
Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
• 10.10 PBX Configuration—System—Extension CID Settings
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Caller ID Modification Table
• 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
– Extension Caller ID Sending
– Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

• 14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
– CLI Destination
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for
DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table— CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection Time
—Outgoing, Incoming

Feature Guide References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
– ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
– CO Setting— Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel

PC Programming Manual 923

Feature Programming References

– Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— CLIP
on ICD Group Button
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main— Extension Number
– CLIP— CLIP ID
– CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP— CLIR
– CLIP— COLR
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– CLIP— CLIP ID
– CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP— CLIR
– CLIP— COLR
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name

Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Centralised Voice Mail

• 9.30 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for
PRI23 Card
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission

924 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat

Counter
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Timer
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—Maintenance
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Class of Service (COS)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Feature Guide References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No
Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Guide References

4.3.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

Communication Assistant (CA)

• 9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Port Number— Built-in Communication
Assistant Server
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
→ Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in
Communication Assistant
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in
Communication Assistant

Feature Guide References

2.26.2 CA (Communication Assistant)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service

PC Programming Manual 925

Feature Programming References

– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
3PTY
– CCBS Option
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service
– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E,
E911, 3PTY
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

• 9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)

Feature Guide References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Echo Cancel—Conference
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.14.2 Conference

Conference Group Call

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—
Ring Duration

926 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call

Operation
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference
Group Call Operation
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group
• 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Conference Group—Member List

Feature Guide References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Confirmation Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Feature Guide References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Data Line Security

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set /
Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode

Feature Guide References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

DHCP
• 27.2.1 Network Service—Server Feature—DHCP

Feature Guide References

5.5.6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

Dial Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 3
– Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Feature Guide References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

PC Programming Manual 927

Feature Programming References

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Feature Guide References

2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– Pulse Speed

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Direct In Line (DIL)

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—DDI / DID
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
– DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
– DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
– DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
– DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
– DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
– DISA—Reorder Tone Duration

928 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock

Counter
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Accept the Call from DISA
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Display Information
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 5— PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— CO Name

Feature Guide References

2.21.4 Display Information

Do Not Disturb (DND)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—
Busy Tone / DND Tone
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— DND Override
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.2 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

PC Programming Manual 929

Feature Programming References

Door Open
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone
—Open Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Door Unlock

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

Door Open
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone
—Open Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Door Unlock

Feature Guide References

2.18.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
– Doorphone—Call Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Doorphone Call
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called
by Voice
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Guide References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

E-mail Notification for Extension Users

• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters— E-mail/Text Message Device—
Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
• 27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Guide References

5.3.1 E-mail Notification for Extension Users

E-mail Notification of System-level Events

• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 7.7 Utility—Email Notification
• 8.2.1 Users—Add User—Single User
• 27.2.5 Network Service—Server Feature—SMTP

930 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide References

5.3.2 E-mail Notification of System-level Events

Emergency Call
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—TRS—Emergency Dial

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Enhanced Walking Extension

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension

Feature Guide References

2.24.3.2 Enhanced Walking Extension

Executive Busy Override

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny
Set / Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy
Override
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive
– Executive Busy Override
– Executive Busy Override Deny
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive
Override Deny

Feature Guide References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
– Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
– Remote Extension Dial Lock On
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level on Extension
Lock

Feature Guide References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension Feature Clear
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension Clear—Call Waiting
– Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
– Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual 931

Feature Programming References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension PIN Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

Feature Guide References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Feature Access (EFA)

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode
during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode
during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA

Feature Guide References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

• 9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Relay Access
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— External Relay Access
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Guide References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

External Sensor
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— External Sensor—Ring
Duration
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— External Sensor—Ring
Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Guide References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Fax Cover Page

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options— Cover Page Language

932 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management

– Fax Properties—System Name (Up to 25 characters)
– Fax Properties—System Fax Number (Max. 20 digits)
– Fax Properties—Printed Information
– Fax Properties—Printed Information Position
– Fax Properties—Cover Page

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.14 Fax Cover Page

Fax Resend
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv— Auto
Forwarding Message Type
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Fax Options
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.30 Send to Fax Machine

Flash/Recall/Terminate
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode
during CO Conversation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode
during CO Conversation
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display
Duration in Idle Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 12.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
• 12.1.5 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—PF Button
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main
– Extension
– Features
– Other PBX Extension
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual 933

Feature Programming References

5.4.7 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
– Floating Extension Number
– Group Name
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager— Page Number 1—Floating Extension
Number
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension
Number

Feature Guide References

5.4.8 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 1
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Feature Guide References

2.3.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Group
• Section 11 PBX Configuration—Group

Feature Guide References

5.1.2 Group

934 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Group Call Distribution

• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main— Distribution Method
– Main— Call Waiting Distribution
– Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
— Delayed Ring
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
– Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
– Options—Longest Idle Distribution
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Hands-free Answerback
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— Automatic Answer
(Caller)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
– Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5— Automatic Answer for CO Call
– Option 6— Forced Automatic Answer

Feature Guide References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Answer
Mode

Feature Guide References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Headset Operation
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.11.4 Headset Operation

PC Programming Manual 935

Feature Programming References

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Hot Line
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Program Set / Cancel
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.

Feature Guide References

2.6.6 Hot Line

Idle Extension Hunting

• 11.6 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group
• 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Miscellaneous
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
— Supervisor Extension Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5— Incoming Call Display
– Option 6— Display Lock
– Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings

936 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Option 5— Incoming Call Display

– Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory

Feature Guide References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service

• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension
Inter-digit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial
for en Bloc mode
• 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main— Extension Number
– Option 7— ISDN Bearer
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer

Feature Guide References

4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

Intercept Routing
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing
No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—
Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No
Answer— Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Routing—No Destination

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No
Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

PC Programming Manual 937

Feature Programming References

Intercom Call
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Alternate Calling -
Ring / Voice
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main— Extension Number
– Main— Extension Name
– Option 3— Intercom Call by Voice
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name

Feature Guide References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block— COS Number of the
Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone— COS
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Relay— COS Number

Feature Guide References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone— Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

2.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• 9.13 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Card Property
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

ISDN Extension
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Extension Setting

Feature Guide References

5.2.3.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

938 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button

– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

KX-UT Series SIP Phones

• 9.19 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Card Property
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-UTEXT32—Port Property
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.3 KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Last Number Redial

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
– Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2
– Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
– Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing
Call Log Memory
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing
Call Log Memory

Feature Guide References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

LED Indication
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Feature Guide References

2.21.3 LED Indication

Line Preference—Incoming
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming
Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming
Preferred Line

Feature Guide References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

PC Programming Manual 939

Feature Programming References

Line Preference—Outgoing
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing
Preferred Line
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing
Preferred Line

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Local Alarm Information

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main
– SMDR— Print Information—Error Log
– Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
– Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set
– Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour
– Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Guide References

5.5.4 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Log-in / Log-out
– Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
– No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
– Last Extension Log-out
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
— Wrap-up Timer
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—
Wrap-up Timer based on
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up
Timer
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Feature Guide References

940 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Making a TIE Line Call

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table— Own PBX Code

Feature Guide References

4.3.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call

Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— MCID

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Manager Features
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—Password— Manager Password - PT Programming—
Prog *1

Feature Guide References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set /
Cancel / Call Back
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message Waiting
Set
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
– Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Option 5— SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

PC Programming Manual 941

Feature Programming References

– External MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)

Feature Guide References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data
Transfer
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking
Data Transfer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.1.6 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 12.2.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 17.2 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Data Transmission
• 17.3 PBX Configuration—Private Network—Network Operator (VoIP)
• 17.4 PBX Configuration—Private Network—NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network ICD Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Guide References

4.3.6 Network ICD Group

Off-hook Monitor
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Feature Guide References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

One-look Networking
• 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types
• 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard
• 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

Feature Guide References

4.2 One-look Networking

942 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

One-touch Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible
Button Programming Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible
Button Programming Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)

Feature Guide References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Guide References

5.1.5 Operator Features

Outgoing Message (OGM)

• 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—
Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear /
Playback
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
— Delayed Ring
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing
Sequence—Sequence 01–16
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension
Number

Feature Guide References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Overflow Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy

PC Programming Manual 943

Feature Programming References

– Overflow No Answer
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Paging
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Paging
– Group Paging Answer
– Paging Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
– Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
– Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)
– Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
• 11.4 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group
• 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—All Setting
• 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Paging Group—External Pager
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Paging
Deny

Feature Guide References

2.17.1 Paging

Pause Insertion
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— During Conversation—Pause
Signal Time
• 14.4 PBX Configuration—Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options
– Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
– Option 6 (CTI)— CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)

944 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

• 9.5 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Site Property— P2P Group
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property— P2P Group
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 7
– P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
– P2P Group—Video Conference
• 11.10 PBX Configuration—Group—P2P Group
Feature Guide References
5.2.1.4 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Ping
• 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

Feature Guide References

5.5.7 PING Confirmation

Portable Station (PS) Connection

• 9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Printing Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Printing Message
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—
Printing Message 1–8

Feature Guide References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by
SCO key
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

Feature Guide References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PS Directory
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension
Name
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name

PC Programming Manual 945

Feature Programming References

– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.3 PS Directory

PS Ring Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Distribution Method
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group
• 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.2 PS Ring Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS Out of
Range Timer
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range
Registration

Feature Guide References

4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

PT Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— PT Programming
Mode
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—Password
– Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Feature Guide References

5.4.3 PT Programming

QSIG Enhanced Features

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG

Feature Guide References

4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features

Queuing Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Queuing Time Table
– Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on VM Group

946 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Quick Dialling
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.5 Quick Dialling

Reverse Circuit
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Reverse Detection

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

• 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–
8
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone— Ring Tone Pattern
Plan 1–8
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone
Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern
Table

Feature Guide References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
– Bill— Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest

Feature Guide References

2.23.2 Room Status Control

Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only)

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Label Name

Feature Guide References

PC Programming Manual 947

Feature Programming References

2.21.5 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only)

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

• 9.15 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Card Property
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT32—Port Property

Feature Guide References

5.2.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

• 9.8 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Shelf Property
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Card Property
• 9.10 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW—Port Property

Feature Guide References

4.1.1 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

• 27.3.3 Network Service—Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Guide References

5.5.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

Software Upgrading
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update

Feature Guide References

5.4.9 Software Upgrading

Special Carrier Access Code

• 15.3 PBX Configuration—TRS—Special Carrier

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Speed Dialling—Personal/System
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
– Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System
Speed Dialling
• 12.1.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Speed Dial
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant— System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

948 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue
CO Call Duration Start
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO
Call Printout (SMDR)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
– Charge— Charge Options—Currency
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main
– SMDR
– SMDR Options
– RS-232C

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Supervisory Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
— Supervisor Extension Number

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Syslog Record Management

• 27.3.2 Network Service—Client Feature—Syslog

Feature Guide References

2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management

Tenant Service
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—System—Operator & BGM
– PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table
• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—Group—User Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Tenant
Number
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone— Tenant Number
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Sensor— Tenant No.
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—Feature—Tenant
• Section 16 PBX Configuration—ARS
• 16.5 PBX Configuration—ARS—Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Tenant Number
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— Tenant Number

PC Programming Manual 949

Feature Programming References

• 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN— Tenant Number

Feature Guide References

5.1.3 Tenant Service

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Guide References

4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

TIE Line Service

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—
Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—
Trunk Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—TIE
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– TIE Line Access
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by
Extension Numbering
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
– DIL— Trunk Property
– DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table— DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Guide References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Time Service (Day / Lunch /
Break / Night) Switch
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Time Service
Switch
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button

950 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Feature Guide References

5.1.4 Time Service

Timed Reminder
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
– Timed Reminder—Interval Time
– Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
– Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed Reminder—Ring
Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System— Timed Reminder
Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—
Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—Maintenance—Main—SMDR— Print Information—Timed Reminder
(Wake-up Call)

Feature Guide References

2.24.4 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
– TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 15.1 PBX Configuration—TRS—Denied Code
• 15.2 PBX Configuration—TRS—Exception Code
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—TRS—Special Carrier
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous

PC Programming Manual 951

Feature Programming References

Feature Guide References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property— Connection
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port— Connection
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Connection
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– Single CO Line Access
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 16.1 PBX Configuration—ARS—System Setting— ARS Mode
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings— CO Name

Feature Guide References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Guide References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Busy Out Status
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Busy Out Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 4— Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

Feature Guide References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Trunk Call Limitation

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO
Line Call Duration Limit

952 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For

Incoming Call
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—TRS—Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Feature Guide References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group

• 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters— Alternate Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv
– Auto Forwarding Active
– Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Auto Forwarding Delay Time
– Auto Forwarding Message Type
– Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
– Auto Forwarding Mode
– Auto Forwarding Expires Date and Time

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Auto Receipt

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA)

• 23.2 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Parameters
– Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
– Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)
– Play Owner's Name during Transfer
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)
– Call Hold Mode—Redial Cancel Timing (s)

PC Programming Manual 953

Feature Programming References

– Alternate Extension
– List All Names
– Operator Transfer Mode

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Unified Messaging—Automatic Login

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

• 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
– Internal Call
– External Call
– Supervisor
– UM Group No.
– Mailbox Number

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Unified Messaging—Call Services

• 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.6 Call Services

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario

• 8.1.1 Users—User Profiles—Advanced setting
• Advanced Call Transfer Setting
• Scenario Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

954 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— Call Transfer Status

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer— Call Transfer to Outside
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters—Telephone Device—Device No.
1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Message Waiting Notification— System
Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.9 Callback Number Entry

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Caller ID Callback
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside— Trunk Group 1–
96—Caller ID Callback

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.10 Caller ID Callback

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer— Caller ID Screen

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement
(Selection)
• 24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

PC Programming Manual 955

Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Call-through Service

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General— Call-through Service
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside— Outside Transfer
Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.6 Call-through Service

Unified Messaging—Company Greeting

• 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Daily Hours Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Unified Messaging—Covering Extension

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— Covering Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Unified Messaging—Custom Service

• 23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder

• 23.3 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Custom Service—Custom Service Builder

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.1 Custom Service Builder

Unified Messaging—Default Mailbox Template

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Adding Mailboxes

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.2 Default Mailbox Template

Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters
– First Name
– Last Name
• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

956 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service— Direct
Service UM Extension

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.12 Direct Service Access

Unified Messaging—Extension Group

• 24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv
– External Message Delivery Active
– External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— Extension
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Personal Distribution List
• 24.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.17 Group Distribution Lists

Unified Messaging—Hold
• 23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—Service
Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)
– Call Hold Mode—Redial Cancel Timing (s)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.20 Hold

Unified Messaging—Holiday Service

• 10.5 PBX Configuration—System—Holiday Table

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual 957

Feature Programming References

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— Mailbox Password (Message client)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General
– Fax Option
– Desktop Messaging

Feature Guide References

3.3.2 IMAP Integration

Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters
– Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
– Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings— Intercept to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.23 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Call Transfer
– Intercom Paging Group
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Unified Messaging—Interview Service

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— Interview Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.25 Interview Service

Unified Messaging—List All Names

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General— Directory Listing

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.26 List All Names

Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS)

• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Live Call Screening—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

958 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4

– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS
Recording Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.19 Live Call Screening (LCS)

Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— All Calls Transfer to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.27 Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

Unified Messaging—Mailbox
• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.20 Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General
– System Manager Authority
– Message Manager Authority

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.22 Manager Service Switching

Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters— All Calls Transfer to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.28 Message Reception Mode

Unified Messaging—Message Transfer

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Announce Message Transferred Information

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.23 Message Transfer

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages

PC Programming Manual 959

Feature Programming References

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order

– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Fax File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General
– E-mail Option
– Fax Option
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters— Message Waiting Lamp
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Message Waiting Notification—
Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min)
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and
Next Device
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Message Waiting Notification

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service

• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service

Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv
– No DTMF Input Operation
– No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

960 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.33 No DTMF Input Operation

Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.34 On Hold Announcement Menu

Unified Messaging—Operator Service

• 23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—Service
Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Unified Messaging—Password Administration

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Mailbox Parameters
• Mailbox Password
• Mailbox Password (Message client)

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.3 Password Administration

Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv— Personal
Custom Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox
– Personal Greeting Length (s)
– Personal Greeting for Caller ID

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings

Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
– PIN No.
– Description

PC Programming Manual 961

Feature Programming References

– Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.37 Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

Unified Messaging—Port Service

• Section 22 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.38 Port Service

Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service— Remote Call
Telephone Number 1, 2

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.29 Remote Call Forwarding Set

Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General— Tutorial

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.31 Subscriber Tutorial

Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore

• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore
• 6.11 Tool—UM Backup History

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.4 System Backup/Restore

Unified Messaging—System Prompts

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—General— Prompt Mode
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Unified Messaging—System Reports

• 7.5.3 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Feature Guide References

962 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

3.1.2.5 System Reports

Unified Messaging—System Security

• 26.1 UM Configuration—System Security

Feature Guide References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Unified Messaging—Toll Saver

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver
• 23.1 UM Configuration—Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing—23.2 UM Configuration—Service
Settings—Parameters
– Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
– Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer
Recall
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings— Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.43 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port)

• 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.45 Trunk Service (Universal Port)

Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings— Two-way Recording
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings— Two-way Recording
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

PC Programming Manual 963

Feature Programming References

– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Unified Messaging—Urgent Message

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Ext Msg Del/Auto Fwd/Personal Cust Serv— Auto
Forwarding Message Type Urgent
• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings—Announce Number of Messages
– Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages
– Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages
• 21.1 UM Configuration—Class of Service—Mailbox— First Playback Urgent Message

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.35 Urgent Message

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Key Setting— Extension
Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button—Key Setting— Extension
Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.36 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service

• 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Guide References

3.2.1.46 Voice Mail Service

Unified Messaging—Web Programming

• 20.1 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings
• 22.1 UM Configuration—UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group— Day, Night, Lunch, and Break
Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
• 24.1.1 UM Configuration—System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Guide References

3.2.2.37 Web Programming

UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Integration

• 4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS

Feature Guide References

5.5.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Integration

964 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

User Profiles
• Section 8 Users
• Section 12 PBX Configuration—Extension
• Section 20 UM Configuration—Mailbox Settings

Feature Guide References

5.4.1 User Profiles

Verification Code Entry

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock
Counter
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation /
Walking COS / Verification Code
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3— Charge Limit
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 1— ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3— Charge Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—Feature—Verification Code

Feature Guide References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
— VIP Call Mode

Feature Guide References

2.2.2.5 VIP Call

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—
Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—
Trunk Property
• 16.2 PBX Configuration—ARS—Leading Number— Leading Number
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—Private Network—TIE Table
– Leading Number
– Removed Number of Digits
– Added Number

Feature Guide References

4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Virtual PS
• 9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station— Registration

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.6 Virtual PS

PC Programming Manual 965

Feature Programming References

Voice Mail (VM) Group

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Voice Mail Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer
Recall
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 12.1.4 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS
Recording Mode
• 12.2.3 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—Optional Device—Doorphone— UM Service Group No.
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Guide References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

• 27.1 Network Service—IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings— DSP IP Setting—DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP
Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2—IP Address

Feature Guide References

4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

966 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Walking COS
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation /
Walking COS / Verification Code
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

Feature Guide References

2.7.5 Walking COS

Walking Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

Feature Guide References

2.24.3 Walking Extension Features

Whisper OHCA
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT32—Port Property—Option— IP Codec Priority
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant— OHCA / Whisper
OHCA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—System—System Options—Option 5— Whisper OHCA—for SLT

Feature Guide References

2.10.4.3 Whisper OHCA

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

• 9.29 PBX Configuration—Configuration—Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Set / Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Wireless
XDP

Feature Guide References

5.2.2.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

PC Programming Manual 967

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.net/

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System
Networks Co., Ltd.

Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2011

PNQX3643XA DD1111HH2052